Digital PDFs

EK-11785-UG-PRE

May 1984

322 pages

Original

13MB

Document:	VAX-11/785 Hardware User''s Guide
Order Number:	EK-11785-UG
Revision:	PRE
Pages:	322
Original Filename:

OCR Text

EK-11785-UG-PRE

VAX-11/785
Hardware
User's Guide

EK-11785-UG-PRE

VAX-11 /785

Hardware
User's Guide

Prepared by Educational Services
of
Dlgltal Equipment Corporation

The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.

Printed in U.S.A.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~nmnoma™
DATATRIEVE
DEC
DEC mate
DECnet
DECset
DECsystem- I 0
DECSYSTEM-20

DECtape
DEC US
DECwriter
DIBOL
MASSBUS

PDP
P/OS
Professional

Rainbow
RSTS
RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

CHAPTER 1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1

SCOPE

The VAX-11/785 Hardware User's Guide contains basic hardware
operating and customer care procedures.
It provides an overview
of the system and peripheral hardware and serves as a general
reference document for the system operator. This manual contains
the following information.
Chapter 1 - An introduction to
documentation.

the

system

organization

and

Chapter 2 - System operation from the operator's console.
Chapter 3
language.

The

console

subsystem

and

console

command

Chapter 4 - The diagnostic supervisor.
Chapter 5 - Operating information for the most
peripheral devices.

commonly

used

Table 1-1 is a list of VAX-11/785 system hardware manuals and
related reference handbooks.
Table 1-2 lists manuals that are
available for the standard peripheral subsystems and options. All
VAX/VMS customers receive the software documentation listed in
Table 1-3. Manuals for optional software are available under
separate license from the address below.
Table 1-1

VAX-11/785 System Hardware Manuals

Title

Document
Number

VAX-11/785 Central Processor Unit
Technical Description

EK-KA785-TD

VAX-11/785 TB, Cache and SBI Control
Technical Description

EK-MM785-TD

VAX-11/785 Console Subsystem
Technical Description

EK-KC785-TD
1-1

VAX-11/780 Power System
Technical Description

EK-PS780-TD

MS780E Memory System
Technical Description

EK-MS78E-TD

MS780 Memory System
Technical Description

EK-MS780-TD

FP785 Floating-Point Accelerator
Technical Description

EK-FP785-TD

DW780 UNIBUS Adapter
Technical Description

EK-DW780-TD

RH780 MASSBUS Adapter
Technical Description

EK-RH780-TD

CI780 Computer Interconnect
Technical Description

EK-CI780-TD

VAX-11/785 Installation Manual

EK-SI785-IN

VAX-11/785 Hardware User's Guide

EK-11785-UG

VAX Diagnostic User Guide

EK-VXllD-UG

DS780 Diagnostic System User Guide

EK-DS780-UG

DS780 Diagnostic System
Technical Description

EK-DS780-TD

VAX Maintenance Handbook, VAX Systems

EK-VAXVl-HB

VAX Maintenance Handbook, VAX-11/780

EK-VAXV2-HB

VAX Hardware Handbook, 1982-83

EB-21710

VAX Architecture Handbook, 1981

EB-19580

Computer Programming and
Architecture - The VAX-11

EY-AX008-DP

System Maintenance Print Set

MP01747-**

Console Maintenance Print Set

MP01748-**

CPU Maintenance Print Set

MP01749-**

FPA Maintenance Print Set

MP01754-**

LA120 Technical Manual

EK-LA120-TM
1-2

LA120 User Guide

EK-LA120-UG

LA120 Operator Reference Card

EK-LA120-RG

LSI-11, PDP-11/03 User's Manual

EK-LS Ill-TM

PDP-11 Bus Handbook

EB-17525-20

Microcomputers and Memories Handbook

EB-20912-20

**Note:

The latest revision is sent if no revision is specified.
Table 1-2

VAX-11/785 Peripheral Manuals

Title

Document
Number

Peripherals Handbook

EB-20443-20

RA60 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA60-UG

RA60 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA60-SV

RA80 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA80-UG

RA80 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA80-SV

RA81 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA81-UG

RA81 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA81-SV

RM05 Disk Subsystem User Guide

EK-ORM05-UG

RM05 Disk Drive Maintenance Manual

EK-ORM05-EC

RP07 Technical Description Manual

EK-ORP07-TD

RP07 User Guide

ER-ORP07-UG

TU77 Magtape Technical Manual Vl

EK-1TU77-TM

TU77 Magtape Technical Manual V2

EK-2TU77-TM

TU77 Magtape Transport User Guide

EK-OTU77-UG

TU78 Magtape Technical Manual Vl

EK-1TU78-TM

TU78 Magtape Technical Manual V2

EK-2TU78-TM

TU78 Magtape Transport User Guide

EK-OTU78-UG

1-3

TU80 Tape Subsystem Technical Manual

EK-OTU80-TM

TU80 Subsystem User Guide

EK-OTU80-UG

DZ 11 Asynchronous Multiplexer Technical Manual

EK-DZllO-TM

DZ 11 User Guide

EK-DZ 110-UG

DZ32 Technical Manual

EK-ODZ32-TM

DZ32 Asynchronous Multiplexer User Guide

EK-ODZ 32-UG

DMF32 Multi Function Communications
Interface Technical Description

EK-DMF32-TD

DMF32 User Guide

EK-DMF32-UG

Table 1-3

VAX/VMS Software Documentation
Document
Number

Volume

Title

GENERAL INFORMATION

VAX-11 Information Directory
and Index

AA-D016E-TE

VAX/VMS Summary Description and
Glossary

AA-D022C-TE

VAX/VMS Primer

AA-D030C-TE

COMMAND LANGUAGE AND SYSTEM MESSAGES
VAX/VMS Command Language User's
Guide

AA-D023C-TE

COMMAND LANGUAGE AND SYSTEM MESSAGES
VAX/VMS Guide to Using Command
Procedures

AA-H782B-TE

VAX/VMS System Messages and
Recovery Procedures Manual

AA-D017C-TE

TEXT EDITORS AND FORMATTERS

1-4

VAX-11 SOS Text Editing Reference
Manual

AA-MS38A-TE

EDT Editor Manual

AA-J726A-TC

VAX-11 DIGITAL Standard Runoff
User's Guide

AA-J268B-TK

PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
VAX-11 Utilities Reference Manual

AA-H781B-TE

VAX/VMS Magnetic Tape User's Guide

AA-MS39A-TE

VAX-11 SORT/MERGE User's Guide

AA-Dll3C-TE

PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
VAX-11 MACRO user's Guide

AA-D033D-TE

VAX-11 MACRO Language Reference
Manual

AA-D032D-TE

VAX-11 Linker Reference Manual

AA-D019C-TE

VAX-11 Symbolic Debugger Reference
Manual

AA-D026D-TE

SYSTEM SERVICES AND I/O
VAX/VMS System Services Reference
Manual

AA-D018C-TE

SYSTEM SERVICES AND I/O
VAX/VMS I/O User's Guide (Vol. 1)

AA-MS40A-TE

VAX/VMS I/O User's Guide (Vol. 2)

AA-MS41A-TE

RUN-TIME LIBRARY
VAX-11 Run-Time Library User's Guide

AA-L824A-TE

VAX-11 Run-Time Library Reference
Manual

AA-D036C-TE

RUN-TIME LIBRARY
1-S

VAX-11 Guide to Creating Modular
Library Procedures

AA-HSOOC-TE

VAX-11 Run-Time Library Language
Support Reference Manual

AA-Jl07B-TE

VAX-11 RECORD MANAGEMENT SERVICES
Introduction to VAX-11 Record
Management Services

AA-D024D-TE

VAX-11 Record Management Services
Tuning Guide

AA-M542A-TE

VAX-11 Record Management Services
Utilities Reference Manual

AA-M554A-TE

VAX-11 Record Management Services
Reference Manual

AA-D031D-TE

COMPATIBILITY MODE (RSX-llM)
VAX-11/RSX-llM User's Guide

AA-D037C-TE

VAX-11/RSX-llM Programmer's
Reference Manual

AA-D020C-TE

SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
VAX/VMS Real-Time User's Guide

AA-H784B-TE

VAX/VMS Guide to Writing a
Device Driver

AA-H499C-TE

VAX/VMS System Dump Analyzer
Reference Manual

AA-J526B-TE

VAX-11 PATCH Utility Reference
Manual

AA-H785B-TE

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AND OPERATION
VAX-11/780 Software Installation
Guide

AA-M545A-TE

VAX/VMS System Management and
Operations Guide

AA-M547A-TE

1-6

VAX/VMS UETP User's Guide
11

AA-D643C-TE

NETWORKING
DECnet-VAX System Manager's Guide

AA-H803B-TE

DECnet-VAX User's Guide

AA-H802B-TE

DECnet-VAX Cross-System Notes

AA-M544A-TE

Hard copy documents may be ordered through the nearest DIGITAL
sales office or the Accessories and Supplies Group catalog, or
from one of the following sources.
Hardware documents:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Publishing and Circulation Services, NR03-l/W3
10 Forbes Road
Northboro, MA 01532
Handbooks and software manuals:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Educational Services Distribution Center
12A Esquire Road
Brookside Industrial Park
North Billerica, MA 01862
Technical and service documents that support the VAX-11/785
(including maintenance print sets and diagnostic listings) are
also available on microfiche.
For information on microfiche
libraries contact:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Micropublishing Systems, FPO/BS
30 North Avenue
Burlington, MA 01803

1-7

1.2

HARDWARE SYSTEM

The VAX-11/785 system contains a central processor unit (CPU) with
an optional floating-point accelerator, an I/O subsystem, a main
memory subsystem,
console subsystem, and peripheral devices.
Figure 1-1 is a block diagram of a VAX-11/785 system.

CPU

i...

SBI

......

MAIN
MEMORY
SUBSYSTEM

ID BUS

•
CONSOLE
SUBSYSTEM

~ MASSBUS .......

-.......

INPUT/
OUTPUT
SUBSYSTEM

PERIPHERAL
MASS STORAGE
UNIT RECORDS
UNIBUS .....
TERMINAL

SBl-SYNCHRONOUSBACKPLANEINTERCONNECT
CPU-CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT
ID BUS - INTERNAL DATA BUS

Figure 1-1

1.2.1

TK-GIMlll

VAX-11/785 System Block Diagram

Central Processor Unit (CPU)

The VAX-11/785 CPU is a high-speed microprogrammed 32-bit computer
which runs on a 133 nanosecond clock cycle. Figure 1-2 is a
functional block diagram of the CPU.
In normal operation, data enters and leaves the CPU over the
synchronous backplane interconnect (SBI). Since data is fetched
from main memory eight bytes at a time, some may be stored
temporarily in the data cache before going to a buffer to be
decoded. The required data from a physical address is retrieved
from memory if it is not already in the data cache.
The instruction buffer decodes instructions, and the translation
buffer stores addresses that have been translated from virtual to
physical. The translation buffer is a two-way buffer that stores
virtual to physical address translations for the process currently
executing in the system. The CPU microcode performs the virtual
to physical translation.
For a description of virtual memory
concepts, refer to Appendix A.

1-8

The decoded instruction controls the joint control store (JCS)
function.
rhe JCS contains the two microprogrammed instruction
sets (VAX-11/785 native mode and PDP-11 compatibility mode).
The
selected instruction set controls the operations in the data paths
function.
The data paths function performs the following:
packing and
unpacking of floating-point instructions, address translation, and
arithmetic and logical functions. These sections are independent
and can operate simultaneously.
When an instruction is completed, the data that has been
on is transferred back to memory.

,------------,
I
I r-- ---1

I L-I
I
I
I
L__
1 FPA

OPTI ONAL

TRANSLATION
BUFFER

SBI
CONTROLLER

PA BUS

Lo..

CS BUS

r - _J

SBI
~

I
I

MD BUS

DATA
CACHE

I
I
I

operated

MAIN
MEMORY
SUBSYSTEM

INPUT/

~ OUTPUT
SUBSYSTEM

MASSBU1

DATA
PATHS

L...

J
WCSMAIN
µSEQUENCER

INSTRUCTION
BUFFER

___________
ID BUS

CPU - CENTR AL PROCESSOR UNIT
ID BUS - INT ERNAL DATA BUS
CS BUS - CO NTROL STORE BUS
MD BUS - M EMORY DATA BUS
PA BUS - PH YSICAL ADDRESS BUS
SBI - SYNCHRONOUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT
VA - VIRTUAL ADDRESS

Figure 1-2

_..,

I
I

UNI BUS

r --- -,

I PERIPHERAL I
I
: DEVICES
I

L ___ _J

~---__J

j
CONSOLE
SUBSYSTEM

TK-oeee

CPU Block Diagram

1-9

1.2.2

Floating-Point Accelerator Option

The floating-point accelerator (FP785) is an optional high-speed
processor extension that uses the 133 nanosecond CPU clock. When
included in the processor, the floating-point accelerator executes
the
addition,
subtraction,
multiplication,
and
division
instructions that operate on
singleand
double-precision
floating-point operands.
It also executes the special EMOD and
POLY instructions in both single- and double-precision formats.
In
addition,
the
floating-point
accelerator enhances the
performance of 32-bit integer multiply instructions.
The VAX-11/785 need not include the floating-point accelerator to
execute floating-point instructions.
Its purpose is to speed
execution of these instructions. The floating point accelerator
can be added or removed without changing any existing software.
The only changes required to the hardware are switch settings on
the CPU clock board.

1.2.3

I/O Subsystem

The I/O subsystem contains the SBI, the MASSBUS, and the UNIBUS.
Figure 1-3 is a functional block diagram of the I/O subsystem.

1-10

CENTRAL
PROCESSING
UNIT

ID
BUS

CONSOLE
SUBSYSTEM

SBI

r·

MEMORY
SUBSYSTEM

tiNPt1r10UTPliT"SuiSYsr'EM'"---,
MASSBUS
ADAPTOR

I
I
I

MASSBUS

I
I

r-----,
I

-1

MASSBUS
ADAPTOR
1 T04

,.
I

MASS BUS

L ____ ..J

UNIBUS
ADAPTOR

UNIBUS

I
I

It _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Ji

SBI - SYNCHRONOUS- iACKPLANE INTERCONNECT
ID BUS - INTERNAL DATA BUS

~ICES - UP' TO 8 P'ER MASSBUS

....

MAGTAPE
. FORMATTER

DISK
DRIVE
ONE REQUIRED

t--!

te----1

TE18
MAGTAPE
1 T08PER
FORMATTER

UDASODISK
CONTROLLER

LINE
PRINTERS
UPT04LP11
UPTO 18LA11

CARD
READERS
TO 2 CR11
TERMINAL
LINE INTERFACE
"I

r--

DISK DRIVE
RA WINCHESTER
~ UPT04

H::"""

SYNCHRONOUS
ERIAL LINES

HARD COPY
TERMINAL

> UP TO 98 DEVICES
COMBINED

L-91

VIDEO
TERMINALS
~

Figure 1-3 I/O Subsystem Block Diagram

1.2.3.1

SB! -

The SBI is the system's internal backplane and bus that conveys
addresses, data, and control information between the CPU, main
memory, and peripheral device controllers. The SBI has a cycle
time of 200 ns and can transfer 32 bits of data, along with
numerous control, arbitration, and data integrity signals, each
cycle.

1-11

1.2.3.2

MASSBUS -

The MASSBUS adapter (MBA) is the hardware interface between the
SBI and the high speed MASSBUS storage devices. The MBA performs
control, arbitration, and buffering functions. Up to four MBAs
can be placed on the SBI, with up to eight high speed disks or 64
tapes on each MBA.

1.2.3.3

Unibus -

The Unibus is connected to the SBI by the Unibus adapter (UBA).
All devices other than the high-speed disk drives and magnetic
tape transports connect
to
the
Unibus,
an
asynchronous
bidirectional bus.
The UBA does priority arbitration among
devices on
the
Unibus.
See
Figure
1-3
for
possible
configurations.

1.2.4

Main Memory Subsystem

The main memory subsystem (MS780E) contains an SBI interface and
two memory controllers. Between one and eight MOS RAM arrays are
attached to each controller. Each array can store up to one
megabyte of information. Figure 1-4 is a functional block diagram
of the main memory subsystem.

~E-;O~~S~T;,;- CENTRAL
PROCESSING
UNIT

ID BUS

CONSOLE
SUBSYSTEM

SBI

1
i

-- -

-- --,

I
I

SBI
INTERFACE

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

MEMORY
CONTROLLER

ARRAY(S)

I
I

I
I
MEMORY
CONTROLLER

ARRAY(S)

I
I
I

L------------------- - ...J
MASSBUS
INPUT/
OUTPUT
SUBSYSTEM

UNI.BUS

PERIPHERAL
DEVICES

ID BUS - INTERNAL DATA BUS
SBl-SYNCHRONOUSBACKPLANEINTERCONNECT
M<Vll4-1026

Figure 1-4

Main Memory.Subsystem Block Diagram
1-12

1.2.5

Console Subsystem

The console subsystem consists of a console interface, a control
panel on the VAX-11/785, an LSI-11 microprocessor, an RXOl
diskette drive and controller, and a serial line interface
connected to an LA120 console terminal. A remote terminal and an
interconnecting line unit are optional.
Figure 1-5
is
a
functional block diagram of the console subsystem.
Using the console terminal, the operator can examine and deposit
data in memory locations or the processor registers, halt the
processor, step through instruction streams, and
boot
the
operating system.
The console is the means by which the system can be diagnosed.
The diskette serves as the basic load device for microdiagnostics
and microcode.
An EIA serial line interface and modem can be added to the console
to provide remote diagnosis and automated testing.

CENTRAL
PROCESSING i...
UNIT

MAIN
MEMORY
SUBSYSTEM

SBI

MASS BUS
L.-_.

ID BUS

INPUT/
OUTPUT
SUBSYSTEM

--..,

UNIBUS

lcoNSOLESUBSYsTEM -

- - - -+- -

CONTROL
PANEL

i...

I
~
I
- - ..,
r----.,
I r-I
II
!-------'!
!----TERMINAL
LA 120

SERIAL
LINE UNIT
INTERFACE

I
I
I

CONSOLE
INTERFACE

a Bus
DISK DRIVE
RX01

JllV:l 1

•

I
I
I

I
L _____________ _J
REMOTE . I
TERMINAL

~~T~~':J

I DLV-l l
I
(OPTIONAL).

L- - - - J

LSl-11
MICRO-

PROCESSOR

SBI - SYNCHRONOUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT
ID BUS - INTERNAL DATA BUS

Figure 1-5

Console Subsystem Block Diagram

1-13

PERIPHERAL
DEVICES

1.3

SOFTWARE SYSTEM

The VAX-11/785 software system includes the VAX/VMS operating
system, on-line diagnostics, and the supported languages.

1.3.1
1.3.1.1

VAX Virtual Memory Operating System (VAX/VMS)
Virtual Memory NOTE

A description of the virtual memory concept
in Appendix B.

contained

Virtual memory extends the system memory onto disk space.
From
the programmer's viewpoint, the secondary storage locations are
treated as memory. The size of virtual memory depends on the
amount of physical memory available plus the amount of disk
storage used for nonresident data and code. This design provides
some obvious advantages.
With virtual memory the user can write and execute large programs
without worrying about addressing limitations. VAX/VMS provides
more virtual memory addresses than physical addresses. The system
hardware and software cooperate to translate the virtual memory
requirements of the user's program into whatever physical memory
is available on the system.
The VAX-11/785 physical memory
configuration can change without requiring program redesign or
relinking.
Programs need not be structured, although they may be
to achieve maximum efficiency and performance.
Virtual memory allows large programs (in excess of physical
memory) to be executed.
The program's virtual addresses are
translated into the available physical memory.
Methods by which the VAX/VMS operating system benefits from a
virtual memory system are developed in the following paragraphs.

1.3.1.2

User Environment -

System Management -- VAX/VMS provides tools for a system manager
and a system operator to control the configuration and operation
of the system to realize its most effective use.
The system
manager authorizes system users, determines quotas to control
virtual memory usage, and defines privileges and priority to each
1-14

user. At run time, the system operator can initiate and terminate
sessions, monitor system operations, load and unload volumes, a~d
perform backup and other on-line maintenance activities.
user Access -- To use the system, each user logs in by typing an
identifying user name, account number (optional), and a password.
If the user is authorized, access is granted and the resources of
the system are available for use.
Users communicate with the system with DCL, Digital Command
Language.
It enables users to log onto the system, manipulate
files, develop and test programs, and obtain system information.
It also enables users to extend or redefine their set of commands
and to combine commands to create command procedures.
VAX/VMS supports two instruction
sets:
native
mode
and
compatibility mode.
Native mode contains over 200 opcodes which
constitute the full range of VAX-11 instructions.
Compatibility
mode enables the execution of most PDP-11 instructions. The
exceptions are memory management instructions and floating-point
instructions.
Most user mode programs written for PDP-11, except
stand-alone software, can be run under VMS compatibility mode.
is
Processes -- When a user logs into VAX/VMS, a process (job)
created.
In VAX/VMS a process has two parts: the image that
executes, and the process context. The process context is the
virtual address space and control information required for image
execution.
For example, system and user programs exist under VAX/VMS as image
files.
An image file is the result of linking one or more object
modules together. The image file is loaded by the image activator
(a system service) and executes in the context of the process.
The process executes all of the images needed to perform the
user's requests.
If the user chooses to edit, assemble, and link
a source program, for example, the process executes three images:
the editor, the assembler, and the linker.
A VAX/VMS process can execute any image. Furthermore, a VAX/VMS
process remains to execute subsequent images when the current or
initial image is exited.

1-15

1.3.1.3

Virtual Address Space -

Virtual address space is defined as all possible virtual addresses
that an image executing in the context of a process can use. The
available virtual address space of this system is an array of
bytes labeled O through 2(32)-1 or 4.3 gigabytes.
The virtual address space is divided into four regions, each
approximately 1 gigabyte long.
The top 1 gigabyte region is
reserved for future system expansion.
Addresses in the system
region are used by the VAX/VMS software.
The addresses available for user code are in the process virtual
address space. This comprises the lower 2 gigabytes, the control
region and the program region.
This address space contains
context information and user stacks, one per access mode per
process, maintained by the system on behalf of the process.
It
also contains the image currently executing.
Figure 1-6 illustrates the VAX-ll/785's 4 gigabytes of virtual
address space and how it is allocated between the VAX/VMS and each
process.

PROGRAM
REGION
-1GB

PER PROCESS SPACE
( ONE FOR EACH
EXECUTABLEPROCESSI

-------CONTROL
REGION

-~a.,_

__________

~,,

SYSTEM
REGION
SYSTEM
SPACE

Figure 1-6

Virtual Address Space

1-16

1.3.1.4

Memory Management -

Memory management involves both the VAX-11/785 hardware and the
VAX/VMS software with control of the pages of a process (through
image activation and paging) and the protection of a process.
Pages -- In the VAX-11/785 system, a process's virtual memory is
subdivided into pages of 512 contiguous bytes. This number makes
efficient use of memory and it is the size of a physical block on
a disk.
Image Activator -- The image activator is responsible for making
an image capable of running in the context of the requesting
process. The image activator locates the image and sets up the
proper control information.
Paging -- Paging is the transparent moving of pages to and from
secondary storage as they are needed. As a process executes, only
those pages required for execution, the process's working set,
need reside in physical memory. Remaining pages of the process
can reside on disk and be brought into physical memory when
needed.
A maximum working set size for each process is set by the system
manager so that individual processes will not use enough physical
memory to.degrade the execution of other processes. If a process
is time-critical, the system manager may assign a large maximum
working set size. Parts or all of a working set of a given
process can be locked into memory to gain maximum performance.
The paging facility maintains page tables on the status and
locations of all virtual pages of processes in the system. The
system page table (always in physical memory) maps individual
process page tables (which may or may not be in physical memory).
If a page is not in physical memory, the process page table entry
indicates where the page is on disk. The translation buffer
speeds page table lookup procedures and CPU performance by storing
the most frequently referenced page table entries in a high-speed
memory.
The VMS operating system does process-oriented paging.
It
discards the oldest pages from a process when it is necessary to
make room for new pages required by that process.
The process
pages only against itself.
Individual processes doing a great
deal of paging do not significantly degrade the performance of
other active processes in the system.

1-17

Software caches in physical memory, called the free page list (for
unmodified pages) and the modified page list (for modified pages),
are reserved for the temporary storage of pages removed from
processes' working sets.
As unmodified newly removed pages are
added to the bottom of the free page list, older pages work their
way to the top and the space is eventually reused. As modified
newly removed pages are added to the bottom of the modified page
list, older pages work their way to the top and are eventually
written to a paging file on disk.
If a process needs a page that
happens to be on one of these lists, the page is simply
reallocated to the process, rather than reading the page back into
memory from secondary storage.
The system handles all of the virtual to physical translations for
the user. The user can, if desired, control the paging structure
for the process. A page cluster size can be set at link-time,
thereby causing multiple pages to be mapped from disk to memory to
minimize disk accesses. Pages can be locked in the user's working
set.
Privileged users can lock pages or the entire working set in
memory to gain maximum program performance.
Protection -- Four hierarchical access modes provide protection
for the system (Figure 1-7).
These modes, from most to least
privileged, are: kernel, executive, supervisor, and user.
Each page table entry contains a code specifying, for each of the
four modes, the type of access (read only, read write, and no
access)
allowed to the associated memory page.
If a less
privileged mode can access a page, then a more privileged mode can
also access the page.
In VAX/VMS, the system services (record management services, I/O
drivers, etc.) are part of every process's virtual address space.
However, individual pages are protected in different access modes.
For example, the I/O drivers, scheduler, and record management
service execute in kernel mode;
the record manager executes in
executive and kernel modes;
the command language interpreters
execute in supervisor mode; user software and utility programs
usually execute in user mode (although the system manager can
assign privileges to users allowing them to protect pages at
higher levels).
The access modes only determine access to pages (they do not
affect the virtual space in which programs are mapped). By
assigning appropriate access modes to pages of a process, the
operating system is protected from users who might inadvertently
try to destroy operating system information.

1-18

MORE
PRIVILEGED

Tlt .....1

Figure 1-7

1.3.1.5

VMS Hierarchical Access Modes

Interprocess Communication -

VAX/VMS provides a number of
communicate with one another.

1-19

methods

which

processes

can

Implicit communication using shared files or shared memory
(the run-time library is an example of system code that is
shared).
NOTE
Memory data can be shared
between
native
and
compatibility mode programs, but code cannot because
the instruction sets are different.

Cooperating
flags.

processes

can

synchronize

using

common

event

Message communication is allowed through mailboxes. A mailbox
is a buffer in virtual memory that is treated as if it were a
record-oriented I/O device. Mailboxes are accessed through
the
operating
system's
I/O system, and processes can
communicate by reading and writing messages through a mailbox.
This method provides more protection, but requires system
overhead.

1.3.1.6

Scheduling And Swapping -

The VAX/VMS scheduler and swapper are responsible for ensuring
that processes receive processor time that is appropriate for
their priority and their ability to execute.
The scheduler determines the order in which processes
are
executed. It uses fixed priorities for time-critical applications
and recomputed priorities for interactive and batch processes.
VAX/VMS
scheduling
is
priority-ordered,
preemptive,
round-robin/time-slicing, and event-driven.
The VAX operating
system defines 32 levels of priority. Any number of processes can
execute at each level.
Of the 32 software levels, levels 16 through 31 are reserved for
time-critical processes.
Once a priority is assigned to a
process, either at login time, by the system manager, or by
privilege system service, the system does not modify it.
Each process assigned to levels 0 through 16 is assigned a base
priority;
the process never drops below its base, and may even
receive a temporary boost. The actual priority at which it is
scheduled is recomputed by the system (based on the type of
process and its execution history) to achieve the best possible
1-20

balance among all processes.
For example, the scheduler tries to
maintain a balance between
interactive
and
computer-bound
processes;
it favors interactive processes and processes doing
I/O for faster response.
The scheduler always selects the highest priority, executable,
resident process, and schedules by round-robin within the same
priority level. The scheduler guarantees execution for a minimum
amount of time of any process that it brings into memory from
disk.
Events are occurrences that cause the status of a process to
change.
When the status changes,
the process is moved to an
appropriate priority queue to be scheduled for execution.
Swapping involves the moving of a process's entire working set in
and out of memory in a multiuser environment. Maintenance of the
balance set {processes in physical memory)
is handled by the
swapper, whose function is to keep the system scheduler supplied
with executable processes by removing and adding processes to the
balance set.

1.3.1.7

File And Record Management Facilities -

Files-11
Files-11, the VAX/VMS file manager, provides a
facility for the access, creation, extension, and deletion of
files.
Designed into the file system is a scheme for volume and
file protection that allows the owner of a file to deny all access
or certain kinds of access to all users, others in the group, the
system, and the owner.
Additional file management features include:
Alphabetically ordered directories for faster search
Multi-volume files
Duplication of critical information {index file header and
home
block)
for
improved
reliability.
Loss of this
information is fatal to the entire volume.
Improved allocation and deallocation of storage space
Dynamic bad block handling
File protection by user identification codes,
read/write protection.

1-21

passwords,

and

RMS/VAX
Record management services (RMS) is a
set
of
general-purpose file handling capabilities that allow user written
application programs to create, access, and maintain data files
and records within the files.

1.3.1.8

Network Communication (DECnet) -

VAX/VMS supports DECnet Phase 2.
Access to network facilities is device-independent.
A user can
exert
control
over operations to obtain error reports or
notification of broken connections. Full login protection applies
to all network access.

1.3.1.9

Batch Facilities -

VAX/VMS supports an extensive batch facility that utilizes the
same command languages as the interactive portion of the system.
Batch facilities under VAX/VMS include the following.
Multistream Batch -- Jobs may be submitted to batch streams from
the interactive environment using a terminal command, from another
batch job, or by any program using a system call. Batch jobs are
queued, and a time may be specified after which a batch job will
execute. The operator controls the number of batch jobs that can
run concurrently. Whenever that limit is exceeded, the remaining
jobs are held in a queue until a batch stream becomes available.
Job Control -- The method chosen to submit a batch job does not
affect the structure of the application program. The user can
control the flow of the batch job by specifying what error
conditions cause the job to stop, and by suspending execution
until an operator loads a device.
Conditional Branching -- The user can specify in a batch stream
where program control should transfer on command errors or errors
returned by the programs that are executed in the stream.
Spooled Printing -- Printer output is generally spooled to a
file-structured volume first, unless the (privileged) program
allocates a printer. Print jobs consisting of one or more files
to be printed together can be submitted from a terminal, from
another batch job, from any program using a system call, and
1-22

automatically at the end of the batch job. Multiple print queues
are also available. The operator defines the number of queues and
the user indicates in the print command which one is to be used.
Spooled Input -- Input spooling is available from the card reader.
Operator Control -- The operator can control batch jobs and
jobs, and can stop a job or change its priority.
Accounting
Batch accounting includes
identification, connect time, CPU usage,
listing count.

user
and
account
I/O usage, and page

In addition to the batch
capabilities
described,
command
procedures are supported by the command language. A command
procedure is a file that contains a sequence of system operating
commands.
It is implemented as an indirect command file and can
be initiated from an active terminal or from within a batch
stream.
Command procedures are most often used as an easy method
of invoking a series of commands required frequently.
Batch command files and command procedures
are
completely
compatible.
Command procedures are executed immediately, within
the context of the initiating process and from an active terminal.
Batch jobs are queued and executed as detached processes under
control of the system.

1.3.2

On-line Diagnostics

An operator can run diagnostics to check the operation of both
hardware and software. An operator can run system exercisers and
device verification diagnostics while normal operations proceed.
System exercisers test general purpose software and compare the
results with known answers, reporting any discrepancies to the
error logger.
Operators can run
device
verification
diagnostics
either
stand-alone or concurrently with other processes. Diagnostics
check the peripheral functions.
In addition, fault isolation
diagnostics, which isolate problems to replaceable units, are
available for stand-alone use.

1-23

1.3.3

Languages

Supported native mode languages include VAX-11
MACRO
and,
optionally, VAX-11 FORTRAN, VAX-11 COBOL, VAX-11 C, VAX-11 BASIC,
VAX-11 PL/I, VAX-11 PASCAL, VAX-11 BLISS-32, and VAX-11 CORAL 66.
Also
supported
in
compatibility
mode are PDP-11 FORTRAN
IV/VAX-to-RSX, and MACR0-11. Development tools for both native
and
compatibility
mode
programs include editors, linkers,
libraries, and debuggers.

1-24

CHAPTER 2
OPERATION

2.1

GENERAL

This chapter contains a description of the VAX-11/785
CPU
specifications, cabinet controls and indicators, and the bootstrap
operations and procedures.

2.2

VAX-11/785 SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2-1 gives
VAX-11/785 CPU.

the

Table 2-1

primary

operating

characteristics

VAX-11/785 Operating Specifications

CHARACTERISTIC

SPECIFICATION

Operating Environment
Temperature

15 to 32 degrees C (59 to 90
degrees F)

Relative humidity

20% to 80%

Power Requirements
ac Power

120/208 volts, 60 Hz

Phases

3 phase 3W+N+G

Input power

3300 watts

2-1

the

2.3
2.3.1

CPU CABINET COMPONENTS
Controls And Indicators

Figure 2-1 shows the CPU cabinet controls and indicators.
With
the cabinet doors closed, only the console control panel controls
and indicators are visible.
Access to the other CPU cabinet
controls and indicators is necessary only for specific test and
maintenance operations.

o-R-MAL

0
0
0
0
D

PLUG IN RIQULATOR 'AILURI
IONI
OVERCURRINT

OVEllVOLTAGI

POWIR INVIRTIR FAILURI

10F'1

OVIRTEMP

POWIR SU"'LY ITYPICAU
NOTE
Pl' 1$ THI MIMOllY POWIR IU"°LY

Figure 2-1

CPU Cabinet Controls and Indicators

2-2

2.3.1.1

Console Control Panel -

The console control panel has a limited number of controls and
indicators. Operations normally associated with a console control
panel (such as examine and halt) are performed through the console
software package using the console command language. The console
control panel is connected to the console interface board.
The
console control panel controls and indicators are described in
Table 2-2.

2-3

Table 2-2

Console Control Panel Controls and Indicators

COlltrol/IMlcator
AUTO RESTART
rocker toggle switch

When in the ON (down) position, the VAX-11/780 CPU is restarted automatically
following a power failure or error halt.

BOOT
rocker pushbutton switch

When pressed, the operating system is bootstrapped. When the bootstrap operation is
completed, the console is set to the program 1/0 mode of operation.

ATIN indicator (red)

When lit, indicates that the CPU is halted.

RUN indicator (green)

When lit, indicates that the CPU is strobing interrupts.

POWER indicator (green)

When lit, indicates that the +5 V power supply is on.

REMOTE indicator (red)

When lit, indicates that remote access is enabled. When extinguished, indicates that
remote access is disabled.

Five position key
rotary selection switch

This is an off/on select switch.

OFF position

In this position, the VAX- I I /780 is turned off.

LOCAL DISABLE position

In this position, remote access is disabled and console 1/0 mode of operation is inhibited.

LOCAL position

In this position, remote access is disabled, but console 1/0 mode of operation is not
inhibited.

REMOTE DISABLE position

In this position. remote access is enabled and console 1/0 mode of operation is not
inhibited.

REMOTE position

In this position, remote access is enabled and the console 1/0 is not inhibited.

2.3.1.2

Power Supplies -

Contained in the CPU cabinet are four outwardly identical power
supplies
(five
if
the optional floating-point adaptor is
installed). The power supply marked PS4 (Figure 2-1), which is
internally different from the others, is the memory power supply.
The other power supplies provide power to the remaining logic
cards.
All power supplies are normally left ON (circuit breaker
up). The power supply controls and indicators are described in
Table 2-3.

2-4

Table 2-3

Power Supply Controls and Indicators

POWER NORMAL {l!f1Cn)

When lit, indicates that the power supply is operating normally.

PLUG IN REGULATOR FAILURE
(red)

When lit, indicates that there is a malfunction in the plug-in regulator in that
power supply. The POWER NORMAL indicator should extinguish.

OVERCURRENT (red)

When lit, indicates that an overcurre~t condition exists. The POWER NORMAL indicator should be extinguished.

OVERVOLTAGE (red)

When lit, indicates that an over voltage condition exists. The POWER NOR·
MAL indicator should be extinguished.

POWER INVERTER FAILURE
(red)

When lit, indicates that a failure has occurred in the invener. The POWER
NORMAL indicator should be extinguished.

OVERTEMP circuit breaker

When tripped (extended), indicates that an ovenemperature condition exists.
The POWER, NORMAL indicator should be extinguished.

on/off circuit breaker

In the on position the power supply is operational if the POWER NORMAL
indicator is lit.

2.3.2

LSI-11 Microcomputer

The PDP-11/03 is a packaged version of the LSI-11 microcomputer.
It includes a rack mountable enclosure containing the LSI-11
processor, memory, an LSI-11 bus-structured backplane, a power
supply, and a control panel containing three indicators and three
switches.
NOTE

The LSI-11 is set to RUN and is
maintenance operations are required.

2-5

not

touched

unless

2.3.2.1

LSI-11 Controls And Indicators -

The LSI-11 controls and indicators are described in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4

LSI-11 Controls and Indicators

Coab'Ol/lllllater

FllllCtiell

DC ON
LED indicator

lllumiJes when the DC ON/OFF toggle switch is set to ON and proper de output
voltagts are being produced by the LSI-I I.
If either the +5 V or + 12 V output from the LSI- I I is faulty. the DC ON indicator does
not illuminate.

RUN
LED indicator

Illuminates when the LSI-I I processor is in the run state (refer to ENABLE/HALT).

SPARE
LED indicator

Not used.

DC ON/OFF
Two-position toggle switch

When set to ON, enables the de outputs. The DC ON indicator illuminates if the de
output voltages are of proper values.
When set to OFF, the de outputs are disabled and the DC ON indicator is extinguished.

ENABLE/HALT
Two-position toggle switch

When set to ENABLE. the 8 HALT L line is not asserted and the processor is in the run
mode (RUN indicator illuminated).
When set to HALT. the B HALT L line is asserted allowing the processor to execute
console ODT microcode (RUN indicator extinguished).

LTC ON/OFF
Two-position toggle switch

When set to ON, enables the generation of the Line Time Clock (L TC) BEVNT L
signal.
When set to OFF, disables the line time clock.

AC ON/OFF (rear panel)
Two-position toggle switch

When set to ON, applies ac power to the LSl-11.
When set to OFF. removes ac power from the LSl-11.

FUSE (rear panel)
5 A fast-slow

2.3.2.2

Protects LSI- I I from excessive current.

Powering-up The LSI-11 -

Place the DC ON/OFF switch in the down position (DC OFF).

Place the AC ON/OFF switch on
supply in the AC ON position.

Place the HALT/ENABLE switch in the desired power-up position.

2-6

the

rear

the

H780

power

NOTE
DC power can be applied with the HALT/ENABLE switch in
either position. However, processor power-up response
is affected by this switch.

Place the LTC ON/OFF switch in the OFF position.

Place the DC ON/OFF switch in the up (DC ON)
position.
console terminal should respond with a printout.

2.3.3
2.3.3.1

The

RXOl Diskette Drive
Diskette Insertion And Removal -

Unlock and open the front doors of the CPU cabinet.

Grasp the handle on the side of the diskette drive assembly
and swing the drive out perpendicular to the CPU cabinet.

Grasp the diskette by the label area and remove
protective cover.

Squeeze the drive assembly handle with
the handle will spring aside.
forefinger;

the

from

the

thumb

and

CAUTION
The drive should not be opened while it is being
accessed.
Data may be recorded incorrectly, resulting
in a CRC error when the sector is read.

Hold the diskette by the label area and
drive assembly.

Close the drive assembly slot cover.

Follow the same procedure to
drive.

2-7

remove

the

into

the

diskette

from

the

insert

2.3.3.2

Diskette Handling Practices And Precautions -

To prolong the diskette life and prevent errors when recording or
reading, reasonable care should be taken when handling the
diskette.
The following handling recommendations should
be
followed to prevent unnecessary loss of data or interruption of
system operation.
1.

Do not write on the envelope containing the diskette.
Write
any information on a label prior to affixing it to the
diskette.

Paper clips should not be used on the diskette.

Do not use writing instruments that leave flakes, such as lead
or grease pencils, on the diskette jacket.

Do not touch the disk surface exposed in the diskette slot
index hole.

Do not clean the disk in any manner.

Keep the diskette away from magnets or tools that may have
become magnetized.
Any disk exposed to a magnetic field may
lose information.

Do not expose the diskette to a heat source or sunlight.

Always return the diskette to the envelope supplied with it to
protect the disk from dust and dirt. Diskettes not being used
should be stored in the file box if possible.

When the diskette is in use, protect the empty
liquids, dust, and metallic materials.

10.

Do not place heavy items on the diskette.

11.

Do not store diskettes on top of computer cabinets or in
places where dirt can be blown by fans into the diskette
interior.

12.

If a diskette has been exposed to temperatures outside of the
operating range, allow 5 minutes for thermal stabilization
before use. The diskette should be removed from its packaging
during this time.

2-8

envelope

from

2.3.3.3

Diskette Storage -

Short Term (Available for Immediate Use)
1.

Store diskettes in their envelopes.

Store diskettes horizontally, in piles of ten or fewer.
If
vertical
storage is necessary, the diskettes should be
supported so that they do not lean or sag, but they should not
be subjected to compressive forces.
Permanent deformation may
result from improper storage.

Store diskettes in an environment similar to that of the
operating system:
as a minimum, store within the operating
environment range.

Long Term
When diskettes do not need to be available for immediate use, they
should be stored in their original shipping containers.
The RXOl contains one switch, which is connected to the disk
access door.
If the door is not closed the disk cannot be run.
To insert and remove disks from the RXOl, the RXOl must be swung
out on its hinges. The RXOl is held in place by a pressure latch
on the mounting plate.

2-9

2.4

BOOTSTRAPPING

The bootstrapping of the
performed when one of
VAX-11/785.

VAX-11/785 is an automatic operation
the listed conditions exists within the
the

control

panel

BOOT

switch

The console/CPU power is applied with
AUTO/RESTART switch set to ON (down).

The VAX-11/785 has been on and the control panel
is pressed.

The VAX-11/785 is operational and the CPU enters either a time
out/odd address or an unused vector trap.

The VAX-11/785 is operational and either the CPU or the
stops.

clock

Some bootstrap operations require little operator intervention
while others require none. Conditions 1 and 2 require operator
action.
The description of the series of events
sequences is contained in Appendix B.

2-10

during

each

these

2.4.l

Bootstrap Terms

A number of terms for data files and programs are used in
describing the bootstrap sequence.
These terms are explained
here.
1.

Console Boot -- The console boot is a program resident in the
LSI-11 ROM.
It is initiated every time the VAX-11/785 is
turned on and every time the console program. crashes.
This
program loads the console program from the RXOl console
diskette (disk RXlA AS-T793*-ME) to the LSI-11 RAM.

Console Program -- The console program is loaded into the
LSI-11 RAM by the console boot. This program contains the
console command language interpreter and the
VAX-11/785
bootstrap functions.

Primary Boot Command File -- The primary boot command file is
contained on the RXOl console diskette. This file contains
the console commands for loading and starting the primary
loader program.
These console commands are executed by the
indirect command file processor in the console program. There
can be more than one primary boot indirect command file, but
the only one that will boot automatically is DEFBOO.CMD.

Primary Loader -- The primary loader is a VAX/VMS operating
system level program that loads a secondary loader program
from the system load device. The parameters for the system
load device are contained in the primary boot indirect command
file. The primary loader file is contained on the RXOl
diskette and is loaded into main memory and started by the
primary boot command file.

Restart Referee -- The restart referee is a ROM operating
system level program that is initiated by the VAX-11/785
console program during an automatic restart sequence.
The
restart referee determines whether a restart will be cold or
warm.

Memory Sizer -- The memory sizer is a ROM operating system
level program that is initiated by the primary boot file
during a cold restart or a boot sequence.
The memory sizer
locates a contiguous block of 64K in memory and sends the
starting address to the VAX-11/785 primary boot. The primary
boot then loads the primary loader in this location.

Secondary Loader -- The secondary loader is an operating
system level program that loads the VAX/VMS or diagnostic
supervisor from the system load device. The secondary loader
is a file stored on the system disk (Files 11 boot block) or
tape (ANSI boot record). The secondary loader is loaded and
started by the primary loader.
2-11

2.4.2

Console (LSI-11) Bootstrap

The LSI-11 bootstrap consists of the following.
1.

The console ROM bootstrap program is started by
as part of the power-on sequence.

A series of LSI-11 tests
executed.

the

console

ROM

The console program is loaded from the RXOl
LSI-11 memory.

diskette

the

The console program is initiated.

If the AUTO
initiated.

bootstrap

If the AUTO RESTART switch is OFF, the console is held in
console I/O mode of operation (awaiting operator input).

the

2.4.3

RESTART

contained

switch

ON,

the

CPU

the

operator

CPU/Memory Bootstrap

The CPU/memory bootstrap consists of the following.
1.

The CPU initialization microcode is executed as
power-on sequence.

part

The CPU waits for the start of a console boot sequence.
console boot can be initiated by one of the following.

the
The

The console BOOT command is entered by the operator.

The console BOOT switch is pressed by the operator.

An auto-restart sequence is initiated.
(The AUTO
switch is ON and a warm restart attempt fails).

RESTART

When any one of the preceding conditions occurs, the
loads a bootstrap into the CPU memory from the RXOl.

console

The console starts the CPU in the bootstrap just loaded.

The console enters the program I/O mode of operation.

2-12

2.4.4

Performing A Bootstrap

To perform a VAX-11/785 bootstrap operation from a cold start,
the following.
1.

Insert the console diskette RXlA (AS-T793*-ME) into
disk drive.

Place the
position.

(down)

Place the five-position rotary selector switch on the
panel to the LOCAL position.

control

The following is printed out at the console terminal.

AUTO

RESTART

toggle

switch

the

de
RXOl

CPU HALTED,SOMM CLEAR,STEP=NONE,CLOCK=NORM
RAD=HEX,ADD=PHYS,DAT=LONG,FILL=OO,REL=OOOOOOOO
!NIT SEQ DONE
HALTED AT 00000000
(RELOADING WCS)
LOAD DONE, 00004800 BYTES LOADED
VER: PCS=Ol-01 WCS=OO-M CON=VOG-00-C
5.

The console enters the program I/O mode of operation
bootstrap operation is complete.

2-13

and

the

CHAPTER 3
CONSOLE OPERATOR/PROGRAM COMMUNICATION

3.1

GENERAL

This chapter contains an introduction to the console subsystem and
a detailed description of the console command language. The
console subsystem is the operator interface for initializing,
troubleshooting,
and
establishing
system controls for the
VAX-11/785 System.
The console subsystem includes the following hardware:
1.

An LA120 terminal and LSI-11 interface

An RXOl diskette drive and interface

An LSI-11 microcomputer with 48K bytes of memory

A console and VAX-11/785 CPU interface

A VAX-11/785 control panel

An optional remote terminal interface

The primary interface between the operator and the
the LA120 terminal.

VAX-11/785

Integral to the console subsystem is a software interface package.
This
software
interface
package
provides
the
means of
communication between the operator (at the operator terminal)
and
the console subsystem, and between the console subsystem and the
VAX-11/785 CPU.

3-1

3.2

OPERATOR/PROGRAM COMMUNICATION

Communication between the operator and the console subsystem is
through the console command language, the diagnostic supervisor,
the microdiagnostic monitor, or ODT (online debugging tool).
The
console command language is described in this chapter. The
diagnostic supervisor is described in Chapter 4.
Both are
English-language based. The microdiagnostic monitor is discussed
in VAX Diagnostic user Guide (EK-VXllD-UG).
See Microcomputers
and Memories Handbook (EB-20912-20) for information on ODT.

3.3

CONSOLE SUBSYSTEM OPERATIONAL MODES

The console subsystem operates in either of two modes, the console
I/O mode or the program I/O mode.
In the console I/O mode, operator inputs in the form of console
commands are interpreted by the LSI-11 based software interface
package. The software interface is loaded into the LSI-11 memory
from the floppy disk or main disk during the boot operation.
In the program I/O mode, the inputs
terminal are transferred to the CPU.
VAX-11/785 operating system.

3.3.1

of the operator to the
The data is handled by the

Console Panel Functions

The functions performed by the console panel include operating
system program control, the entry and display of memory data, and
CPU clock control.

3.3.1.1

Program Control -

The console is used for several program control functions:
it
initializes the CPU using the CCL (console command language)
INITIALIZE command:
it can initiate and terminate operating
system instruction execution:
and it is used for bootstrapping
the VAX-11/785.

3-2

3.3.1.2

Memory Data Entry And Display -

The console can display and modify data contained in the LSI-11
memory,
the VAX-11/785 main memory, I/O registers, general
registers, and internal registers. The address locations can be
read and written in the following quantities:
1.

Main memory:

byte, word, longword, and quadword.

General registers (RO through Rl3, SP, and PC)
registers: byte, word, longword.

3.
4.

and

processor

I/O registers:
data length).

byte, word, longword (dependent upon

LSI-11 memory:

byte, word.

3.3.1.3

Clock Control -

The CPU clock rate can be controlled via the console.
Console
clock
rate
control
is
for
hardware and software
used
troubleshooting. There are three console clock rate control
modes:
1.

Single instruction step

Single SB! bus cycle step

Single CPU time state step.

In the single instruction step mode, the operating system executes
one instruction at a time. The CPU enters the halt state after
the instruction execution.
In the SB! bus single cycle step mode, the CPU clock is stopped at
CPTl or CPT3 when SB! time state 0 (SB! TO) is set. TO remains
set until another cycle is initiated from the console.
In the single CPU time state step mode, the CPU holds in one of
the CPU time states (CPTO, CPTl, CPT2, or CPT3) until a control
signal is received from the console. The CPU then advances to and
holds in the next time state.

3-3

3.3.2

Console Control Functions

Console control functions are provided for the following:

Controlling numeric radices of console input

Controlling console addressing modes

Controlling console data length

Displaying console and CPU status

Repeating commands

Linking commands

3.3.2.1

Default Settings -

The console specifies defaults for the addressing modes, defines
the radix of numeric inputs and outputs, and defines the data
length of addressable memory. The default options are set by the
SET DEFAULT command.
Default settings can be overridden within
the context of a command by the use of a qualifier or changed with
the SET DEFAULT command.
1.

The available addressing modes are virtual, physical, console,
and register addressing (general and internal).

The radices for console numeric inputs and outputs
and hexadecimal.

are

The addressable memory data lengths are byte, word,
and quadword.

longword,

The defaults for power up are:
Radix

= hexadecimal

Data length = longword
Addressing

= physical

3-4

octal

3.3.2.2

Status -

The status of the console and CPU subsystems can be displayed on
the terminal.
The CPU status includes the stop/run state of the
ISP (instruction set processor} level software and current clock
step mode.
The console status includes the current default
settings, the console status, and the number of terminal fill
characters. The status is displayed for each boot cycle, for each
return to the console program, and for each console command
language SHOW command.

3.3.2.3

Command Linking And Repeating -

A group of console commands can be linked into a single executable
list. The linked commands are entered into a queue. The commands
in the queue can be executed once or repeatedly, under the control
of the operator.
Single commands or linked commands can be
repeated.
once initiated,
the
repeating
continues
until
terminated
by
the
operator.
These features are aids to
troubleshooting.

3-5

3.4

CONSOLE SOFTWARE

The console software package consists of a series of modules.
It
is contained in the 4K word ROM (microroutine) on the CIB board
and in the CONSOL.SYS file on the console diskette.
The console
software provides for console control, operator interface, the
console support function, and the initiation of microdiagnostic
testing.
The console is in the null or wait loop the majority of the time.
This null loop consists of a series of tests and conditional
branches. When any branch condition is met, the flag for the
branch is set, and the program branches to the signified routine.

3.5

CONSOLE COMMAND LANGUAGE SYMBOLS AND DEFINITIONS

A number of terms and symbols are used to describe the console
command language.
A list of these terms and symbols and their
definitions is contained in Table 3-1.

3-6

Table 3-1

Console Command Language Symbols and Definitions

Tenn/Symbol

DeOnitioa

Delimits a command from its qualifiers.

Represents the default address when used as an address argument in an examine or deposit command.
(The default address is the sum of the last address used plus the current data length in bytes.)
Used as a separator within a list.

•

Can be used as an address argument in an examine or deposit command to represent the last address
referenced.
Used as a separator within a command line.
Indicates the exclusive OR operation (i.e., selection of parameters within a command line). For example, <A> ! <B> means either <A> or <B> but not both is to be selected.

>>>

Console command language level input prompt character, requesting operator response.

OS>

Diagnostic supervision command language level input prompt, requesting operator response.

MIC>

Microdebugger input prompt, requesting operator response.

<<<

Link mode input prompt, requesting operator response.

VAX/VMS input prompt, requesting user response.

()

Indicates that Ol}e of the syntactic units of the expression are to be selected.

[I'

Indicates the part of an expression that is optional e.g., NEXT [<blank> <count> ) indicates that the
count argument for the NEXT command is optional.
I

Denotes a category name or label e.g .. <address> indicates that a valid address is to be inserted as part
of the command.

<blank>

Represents one or more blank spaces or tabs.

<count>

Represents a numeric count argument.

Indicates one or more occurrences from the category indicated by XYZ.

Represents an address argument.

<data>

Represents a numeric argument.

Represents a command modifier or default.

Represents the console's input prompt string.

<CR>

Represents a console terminal carriage return. Used to terminate each command line.

<LF>

Represents a console terminal line feed.

3-7

3.5.l

Notation Examples

The following is an example of notation within a command line.
EXAMINE [</qualifier - list>]

[<blank> <address>]

For each EXAMINE command there are two options.
1.

A list of one or more qualifiers.

An address argument.
If an address is specified, it
preceded by one or more spaces or tabs.

must

The following are valid EXAMINE commands:
EXAMINE

No qualifiers are entered. The
examine qualifiers are then
entered under the SET DEFAULT
command.

EXAMINE/BYTE/VIRTUAL

Word and address qualifiers
entered but the address is
controlled by default entered
under the SET DEFAULT command.

EXAMINE <space> 1234 or
EXAMINE <tab> 1234

No qualifiers selected. The
qualifiers are controlled by th
default entry in the SET DEFAUL
command.

EXAMINE/WORD <space> 1234 or
EXAMINE/WORD <space> <tab> 1234

3-8

Word qualifier entered (address
by default) a memory argument i
entered.

3.5.2

Command Abbreviations

Console command words
may
be
abbreviated.
The
minimum
abbreviation for each command word is specified in parentheses in
each console command description.
Example
>>>EXAMINE/VIRTUAL/BYTE 1234 may be abbreviated to:
>>>E/V/B 1234
If an incorrect command entry is given, the console software
responds
by repeating the command and stating that it is
incorrect.
Example
>>>HLP
(>>> ? 'HLP' is incorrect.)

3.6

CONSOLE COMMANDS

The console commands are English-language words or their accepted
abbreviations entered by the operator at the console terminal.
These commands can be accepted only when the console is in the
console I/O mode. When a valid command is entered, the indicated
sequence of events is initiated.
When that set of events is
completed, another console command can be entered.
The console commands are described in the following paragraphs.
These descriptions include, as applicable, the following items.
1.

Syntax -- the structure of the command.

command description -- a brief description of the command
operations, general restrictions, and available options.

Response -- a description of the console program
the command.

The terms and symbols used in
Table 3-1.

the

descriptions

are

response

defined

NOTE
Every console command line
carriage return (<CR>).

3-9

must

terminated

with

3.6.1

BOOT Command (B)

Syntax -- BOOT [<device name>] <CR>
The optional <device name> has the format DDn.
DD is
two-letter device mnemonic and n is a one-digit unit number.

the

Description -- The BOOT command initiates a VAX-11/785 system
bootstrap sequence. The command can support bootstrap operations
from or for a set of VAX-11/785 system devices.
When an optional <device name> is not given with the BOOT command,
the console performs the boot sequence for the device preset under
the default listing. The boot program DEFBOO.CMD, written on the
console diskette RXlA, is executed.
When an optional <device name> is given with the command, the
console executes boot program DDBOO.CMD where DDN is the device
name given in the command.
Bootstraps from other than the system default device are performed
by
indirect
command files containing the console commands
necessary to boot from the device named.
Response -- The status of the CPU and CPU controls is printed
the console terminal at the completion of a boot operation.

>>>BOOT
CPU HALTED
INIT SEQ DONE
HALT INST EXECUTED
HALTED AT 00000000

G OOOOOOOE 00000200
LOAD DONE, 00004400 BYTES LOADED
With this command the indirect command file DRBOO.CMD is booted.
The console enters the program I/O mode after executing the
command file.

3-10

Table 3-2 is a list of device names for VAX-11/785 load devices.

3.6.2

Table 3-2

LO ad Device Names

LOAD DEVICE

DEVICE NAME

RA60

DU an

RASO

DU an

RA81

DU an

RM05

DRan

RP07

DB an

· TU77

MTan

TU78

MF an

TU80

MS an

CONTINUE Command (C)

Syntax -- CONTINUE <CR>
Description -- The CONTINUE command causes the CPU to begin
operating system execution at the address currently contained in
the CPU program counter (PC). The CPU is not initialized.
The
console subsystem enters the program I/O mode after the CONTINUE
command is executed.
Response
>>>CONTINUE

3-11

3.6.3

DEPOSIT Command (D)

Syntax -- DEPOSIT [<qualifier - list>] <blank>
<data> <CR>

<blank>

The qualifiers are /BYTE, /WORD, /LONG, /QUAD, /NEXT, /VIRTUAL,
/PHYSICAL, /IDBUS, /VBUS, /INTERNAL, /GENERAL, and /CONSOLE.
Refer to Table 3-4 for a description of these qualifiers.
The DEPOSIT command writes <data> into the specified <address>.
The address space used depends on the qualifiers specified with
the command. If no qualifiers are used, the data and address
defaults (entered via the SET DEFAULT command) are used to
determine the address space.
Response
>>>DEPOSIT lOAD
>>>

310014DA

The <address> argument may be either a number identifying a
location in one of the address options or one of the symbolic
addresses. The symbolic address symbols and a description of them
are contained in Table 3-3.

3-12

Table 3-3

Symbolic Address Symbols

Symllol

PSL

Deposits to or examina the proc:cssor status longword.

Deposits to or examines the program counter (general register F).

Deposits to or examines the stack pointer (general register E).

Deposits to or examines the location immediately following the lut location referenced. For physical and virtual
references the location referenced is the last address plus n where n • (I for byte, 2 for word, 4 for longword, 8
for quadword). For all other address spaces, n is equal to I.
Deposits to or examines the location immediately preceding the last location referenced.

•

Deposits to or examines the location last referenced .

Deposits to or examines the address represented by the last data examined or deposited.

3-13

3.6.4

DIRECTORY Command (DIR)

Syntax -- DIRECTORY <CR>
Description -- The DIRECTORY command provides the user with a
simple directory of an RT-11 format diskette. The diskette must
be in the RXOl drive, and the console must be in console mode.
File size and creation date are not provided.

3.6.5

EXAMINE Command (E)

Syntax -- EXAMINE [<qualifier - list>]

[<blank> <address>] <CR>

The qualifiers are /BYTE, /WORD, /LONG, /QUAD, /NEXT, /VIRTUAL,
/PHYSICAL, /IDBUS, /VBUS, /INTERNAL, /GENERAL, and /CONSOLE.
Description -- The EXAMINE command reads and displays the contents
of the specified <address>.
If no <address> is specified, the
contents of the address defined by the address default (entered
via the SET DEFAULT command) are displayed.
The <address> argument may be one of the symbolic addresses (Table
3-3).
Response -- Sample command entries and console responses
>>>EXAMINE/PHYSICAL 1234
P 00001234 EF89
>>>EXAMINE/VIRTUAL 1234
p 0005634 4567
(The translated physical address is displayed for virtual
examines.)
>>>EXAMINE/G

G 00000000 5432
>>>EXAMINE/BYTE 1234
p 00001234 78
>>>EXAMINE/WORD 1234
p 00001234
>>>EXAMINE/LONG
P 00001236

5678
FFFF1234

>>>

3-14

3.6.6

INITIALIZE Command (I)

Syntax -- INITIALIZE <CR>
Description -- This command sets the CPU to a
condition.

specified

starting

Response
>>>INITIALIZE
!NIT SEQ DONE
>>>

3.6.7

HALT Command (H)

Syntax -- HALT <CR>
Description -- The HALT command stops the CPU after it completes
execution of the instruction that is in process when the HALT
command is entered.
Response
>>>HALT
HALTED AT

00002436

>>>
The number given is the location at which the process is halted.

3-15

3.6.8

HELP Command

Syntax -- HELP <CR>
Description -- The console opens and prints the contents of the
console help file,
an indirect command file.
The help file
contains a description of all console commands.
Response
>>>HELP
CONSOL.HLP - VAX-11/785 Console Help File
Rev: 0.2, 03-Nov-1983
Copyright {c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation

<@EOF>
<@EXIT>
>>>
Refer to Appendix D for a sample
file.

3-16

printout

the

console

help

3.6.9

Error Help Command

Syntax -- @ERROR.HLP <CR>
Description -- The console opens and prints the contents of the
error help file, an indirect command file. The error help file
contains a list of all error messages for the console command
language.
Response
>>>@ERROR.HLP
ERROR.HLP - VAX-11/785 Error Message Help File
Rev: 0.1, 10-0ct-1983
Copyright (c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation

<@EOF>
<@EXIT>
>>>
Ref er to Appendix E for a sample printout
help file.

3-17

the

console

error

3.6.10

LOAD Command

Syntax -- LOAD [<qualifier
<CR>

list>]

<blank>

<file

specification>

The <qualifier list> is the storage location for the file being
loaded;
and the <file specification> is the identity of the file
to be loaded.
Description -- The LOAD command is used to read or transfer file
data from the console floppy disk to main memory, or to Joint
Control Store (JCS). If no qualifier is entered, physical main
memory, location O, is the default location (entered via the SET
DEFAULT command) to begin loading.
The load defaults
are
described in Table 3-4.
Response
>>>LOAD ESSAA.EXE/START:FEOO
LOAD DONE. OOO(OOOBYTE)LOADED
>>>START 10000
DS>
The diagnostic supervisor file is loaded into main
beginning at location FEOO, and it is started at 10000.

3-18

memory

Table 3-4

Load Command Qualifiers

Qualifter

Deftnidoe

/START:<address>

This qualifier specifies a staning address for the file loaded. The console starts loading at address 0
if a qualifier is not given.

/WCS

The WCS is loaded with the specified file.

/PHYSICAL

The physi~~ m~i!1 .~:;.'!1g~ i~ l~aded wHJt 'hr. specified file.

3.6.11

NEXT Command

Syntax -- NEXT [<blank> <count>] <CR>
Description -- With the NEXT command the CPU clock is stepped the
number of times indicated by <count>. The type of step performed
by the clock is determined by the previous SET STEP command.
If a
NEXT command is issued while the CPU is in normal clock mode, it
defaults to single instruction step mode for the duration <count>
of the command. <count> is in hexadecimal or octal, depending on
the current default setting.
The console enters program I/O mode immediately
prior
to
performing the STEP command. The console I/O mode is re-entered
as soon as the STEP command is complete.
Response -- Step-dependent responses are displayed on the console
terminal after the completion of each of the count steps as
specified in the following.
a.

Single Instruction Mode (SET STEP instruction).
>>>SET STEP INSTRUCTION
>>>ST 100
HALTED AT 00000102
>>>NEXT
HALTED AT 00000104
HALTED AT 00000106

3-19

Single Bus Cycle Mode (SET STEP BUS)
>>>SET STEP BUS
>>>
CPU CLK STOP
CPTO UPC=OOFF
>>>NEXT
CPTO
CPTO
CPTO
CPTO
CPTO

UPC-OOFF
UPC-OOFF
UPC-OOFF
UPC-OOFF
UPC-OOFF

>>>NEXT 2
CPTO UPC-OOFF
CPTO UPC-OOFF
c.

Single Time State Mode (SET STEP STATE)
>>>SET STEP STATE
>>>NEXT 6
CPTl
CPT2
CPT3 APC=OOOO
CPTO UPC=OOFF
CPTl
CPT2
>>>SET STEP NORMAL
>>>

If a <count> is not specified in the command, one step is
performed, and then the console enters the space bar step mode.
For each depression of the space bar there is one execution of the
STEP option (BUS, TIME, INSTRUCTION) currently enabled.
If the NEXT command has an argument the space bar step mode is not
enabled.
For example, for a NEXT 2 input, two steps are executed
and the console then prompts for another command.
To exit from the space bar step mode, enter any character except a
space.

3-20

3.6.12

QUAD CLEAR Command (Q Clear)

Syntax -- QCLEAR <blank> <physical address> <CR>
Description -- The QUAD CLEAR command clears the quadword at the
specified
<address>.
The
command
is
used to clear an
uncorrectable ECC error.
Response
>>>QCLEAR 4444
>>>
The <address> is always interpreted as a physical main memory
location. The <address> given is forced to a quadword boundary by
unconditionally clearing the three low-order address bits.

3.6.13

REPEAT Command (R)

Syntax -- REPEAT <console command> <CR>
Description -- With a REPEAT command the specified console command
is repeatedly executed until terminated by a CTRL C ~I IC). Any
console command, except the REPEAT command, may be specified.
Response
>>>REPEAT EXAMINE 100
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p

00000100
00000100
00000100
00000100
00000100
00000100
00000100
00000100

00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000

"C
>>>
The repeat response is dependent on the command
repeated.

3-21

specified

3.6.14

SET CLOCK Command (SE)

Syntax -- SET <blank> CLOCK [<blank> (SLOW FAST NORMAL)] <CR>
Description -- The SET CLOCK command sets the CPU clock to the
speed specified by the command argument (FAST, SLOW, NORMAL). The
clock is stopped (even if it is running at the speed specified in
the command), the speed is changed, and the clock is restarted.
The speeds are as follows:
Fast = 130 ns
Slow = 148 ns
Normal (or no argument)

= 133 ns

The SET CLOCK command must be used when changing clock speed.
Response
>>>SET CLOCK SLOW
>>>

3.6.15

SET DEFAULT Command

Syntax -- SET <blank> DEFAULT [<blank> <default option>] <CR>
Description -- The SET DEFAULT command is used to set the defaults
for address, data length, and radix. The <default options> and
their definitions are contained in Table 3-5. The console applies
the defaults from those set under this command when a console
command does not contain a qualifier.
Response
>>>SET DEFAULT PHYSICAL, BYTE, HEX
>>>

3-22

Table 3-5

Set Default Command Options

Option Group

Item

Specification

Address defaults

Virtual

Sets the default to the specified address.

Physical
General
Internal
ID bus
'i bus

Cb#JSDLE

Data defaults

Byte

Sets the default to the specified data length.

Word
Long
Quad
Radix defaults

Hex

Sets the default for the termi-nal I/O to the specified radix.

Octal

3.6.16

SET STEP Command

Syntax -- SET <blank> STEP [<blank> <step option>] <CR>
Description -- The SET STEP command sets the CPU clock mode.
The
CPU clock modes (<step option>} are defined and listed in Table
3-6.
Response
>>>SET STEP BUS
>>>
Table 3-6

Set Step Command Options

Option Group

Item

Spedficatioll

Step

Instruction

Sets the CPU clock to the single instruction step mode.

Bus

Sets CPU clock to the single Synchronous Backplane Interconn ect
(SBI) cycle step mode.

State

Sets CPU clock to the single SBI time state step mode

3-23

3.6.17

SET TERMINAL FILL Command

Syntax -- SET <blank> TERMINAL FILL <count> <CR>
Description -- The SET TERMINAL FILL command sets the number
{<count>) of blanks that are transmitted to the console terminal
after a carriage return {<CR>) or a line feed {<LF>).
Response
>>>SET TERMINAL FILL:4
>>>

3.6.18

SET TERMINAL PROGRAM Command

Syntax -- SET TERMINAL PROGRAM <CR>
Description -- The SET TERMINAL PROGRAM command places the console
terminal in the program I/0 mode of operation. This command
returns control to a program that was previously interrupted by a
AP.
SET TERMINAL PROGRAM returns the processor from console mode
to program I/O mode.
Response
>>>SET TERMINAL PROGRAM

3.6.19

SET RELOCATION Command

Syntax -- SET RELOCATION:

Description -- The SET RELOCATION command deposits data into the
console's relocation register.
The value <data> set in the
relocation register is added to the effective address of all
virtual and physical memory examines and deposits.
Response
>>> SET RELOCATION: 1000
>>> EXAMINE 200

00001200

{With the relocation set to 1000 an examine
200 command examines the contents of
physical memory location 1200.)
49

>>>

3-24

3.6.20

SET/CLEAR SOMM Command

Syntax -- SET <blank> SOMM <CR>
Description -- The SET SOMM command sets the Stop On Microbreak
Match (SOMM) enable (on the console interface board). The CPU
clock is stopped if SOMM is enabled and the contents of the
microbreak match register (ID register 21), match the contents of
the CPU micro-PC.
The CLEAR SOMM command disables the Stop On Microbreak Match.
Response
>>>SET SOMM
>>>

3.6.21

SHOW Command (SH)

Syntax -- SHOW <CR>
Description -- The SHOW command
console terminal:

displays

the

following

The default settings for data length, address type, and
of address and data inputs and outputs

The terminal fill character count

The CPU status including the run halt state and current
mode setting.
Response
>>>SHOW
CPU HALTED,SOMM CLEAR,STEP=NONE,CLOCK=NORM
RAD=HEX,ADD=PHYS,DAT=LONG,FILL=OO,REL=OOOOOOOO
>>>

3-25

the
radix

clock

3.6.22

START Command (S)

There are two formats used with the START command.
Syntax -or

START <blank> <address> <CR>
START/WCS <blank> <address> <CR>

Description -- The START command of the first format performs
equivalent of the following sequence of console commands:
1.

Initialize the CPU.

Deposit the <address> data in the PC.

Issue a CONTINUE instruction to the CPU.

The START command of the second format performs the equivalent
the following sequence of commands:
1.

Deposit the <address> data in the micro-PC.

Start the CPU clock in the normal mode of operation.
Response
>>>START 100
or
>>>START/WCS FF

3-26

the

3.6.23

TEST Command (T)

Syntax -- TEST [/COM] <CR>
Description
The TEST command enables the microdiagnostic
monitor program. Microdiagnostic execution begins immediately if
no /COM qualifier is entered.
If microdiagnostic testing is
completed and no errors are detected, the console I/0 mode is
re-entered. A microdiagnostic diskette must be loaded in the
RXOl.
With a [/COM] qualifier the microdiagnostic monitor enters
command mode (MIC>) and waits for an operator command.

its

Response
>>>TEST
ZZ-ETKAB
01,02,03,04,
NO. OF WCS MODULES = 0002
05,06,07,08,09,0A,0B,0C,0D,0E,0F,10,ll,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18,19,lA,lB,lC,lD,lE,lF,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,2A,2B,2C,2D,
2E,2F,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,3A,3B,3C,3D,
END PASS 0001
MOUNT FLOPPY & TYPE "DI"
MIC>DI
3E,
# MEM CTRLS= 00000001
3F,40,
4K CHIP 00000608
41,42,
CPU TR= 00000010
43,44,45,46,47,48,49,4A,4B,4C,4D,
CTRL 1 MAX ADR+l= 00040000
4E,
CTRL 1 MAX ADR+l= 00040000
4F,50,
NO FPA
END PASS 0001
MIC>
After running the first microdiagnostic test program, the operator
is
instructed to mount the diskette containing the second
diagnostic test. A microdiagnostic prompt (MIC>) appears.
The
second hits a trap and responds with a microdiagnostic prompt.
The operator returns to the console command program by typing RET
or RET/DI.
RET causes the console to perform a boot operation;
RET/DI returns the console prompt (>>>).

3-27

3.6.24

UNJAM Command (U)

Syntax -- UNJAM <CR>
Description -- This command initiates a clearing

(unjam)

the

SBI.

Response
>>>UNJAM
>>>

3.6.25

WAIT Command (WA)

Syntax -- WAIT <blank> DONE <CR>
Description -- The WAIT command is executed from an indirect
command file.
When executed,
further execution of the command
file is suspended until one of the following occurs:
a.

A DONE signal is received from a program running in the CPU.
On receipt of DONE, the console resumes execution of the
command file.

The console prints <@EXIT> and aborts execution of the
remainder of the console command file if the CPU halts and a
DONE signal is not received.

The operator enters a CTRL C. The console aborts execution of
the remainder of the command file.
Response
WAIT DONE

"'I IC
>>>

3-28

Indirect (@) Command

3.6.26

Syntax -- @<filename> <CR>
Description -- This command causes the console to open the file
specified by <filename> and begin executing console commands from
the file. Execution continues until one of the following events
occurs:
a.

A WAIT DONE command is read
command).

from

the

The end of the indirect file is reached.
<@EOF> and an <input prompt>.

The operator enters a CTRL C 01 IC).
file is aborted.

file
The

BOOT.HLP - VAX-11/785 Bootstrap Help File

>>>

3-29

console

WAIT
prints

Execution of the indirect

Response
>>> @BOOT.HLP

<@EOF>
<EXIT>

(refer

An indirect command file may also be entered using the following
sequence.
Note the lack of prompt characters once this routine
has been entered.
>>>@ESCAA
HALT

HALT THE CPU

INIT

CPU HALTED
! INITIALIZE

UNJAM

!NIT SEQ DONE
! AND CLEAR THE SB!

LO ESCAA.EXE/ST:200
LOAD DONE, 00008400 BYTES LOADED
RH780 MASSBUS DIAGNOSTIC
LO ESSAA.EXE/ST:FEOO
LOAD DONE, 00000000 BYTES LOADED
START 10000
<@EOF>
<@EXIT>
DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR.

ZZ-ESSAA-4.02-417 21-JUL-1978 01:33:44.92

OS>
>>>H
HALTED AT 00016804
>>>

3-30

3.7

CONSOLE COMMANDS PERFORMED WITH CPU RUNNING

Most console commands have an impact on the running of the CPU, so
the CPU must be halted before executing these commands. However,
some console commands do not require interaction with the CPU, and
they may be executed with the CPU running.
These commands
include:
a.

SHOW

HELP

the SET commands

EXAMINE/V BUS

HALT

CLEAR

WAIT

If any other console command is entered while the CPU is running,
the command is rejected and the following error message is
displayed on the console terminal:
? CPU NOT IN CONSOLE WAIT LOOP, COMMAND ABORTED

>>>

3-31

3.8

COMMENTS WITHIN COMMANDS

Comments, preceded by an exclamation mark(!), may be used in any
command line.
When the console detects an exclamation mark, all
remaining text in that command line is ignored.
A comment may
begin in any character position within a command line, including
the first.
(The ! is considered a part of the comment.)
Example

>>>

THIS IS A VALID COMMENT

>>>
The above comment follows directly after the console prompt.

>>> EXAMINE 1234

THIS IS ALSO A COMMENT

>>>
This comment is made
return.

3.9

after

command,

prior

the

carriage

CONTROL AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS

There are a number of control characters and special characters
that cause an action to occur within the VAX-11/785 when entered
independently. These form an integral part of the console command
language.
A list of the control and special characters is
contained in Table 3-7.

3-32

Table 3-7

Control and Special Characters Descriptions

Character

Descrlpd•

CTRL C (tC)

When a CTRL C is typed any repetitive console operation is halted. This includes the
following:
a.

Executions resulting from a repeat command

Successive operations resulting from a /next qualifier

Delays resulting from a wait command

Successive steps resulting from a next command

Aborts further execution of an indirect command file after current instruction is
completed.

The console responds with an <input prompt>.
CTRL 0 (tO)

When a CTRL 0 is entered, the console terminal output is suppressed or enabled (on a
toggle basis).
Console terminal output is always enabled at the next console terminal <input prompt>.

CTRL U (tU)

When a CTRL U is typed before a line terminator, all characters typed since the last line
terminator arc deleted from temporary storage. The console echoes:
U <CR> <LF>

DELETE

Typing DELETE (the DELETE key) deletes the last character typed on an input line. Only
characters typed since the last line terminator can be deleted. Several characters can be
deleted in a sequence by typing successive deletes. The first delete echoes as a backslash(\)
followed by the character which has been deleted. Subsequent deletes cause only the deleted character to be echoed. The next character typed that is not a delete causes another
backslash(\) to be printed, followed by the new character.

CTRL P ( t P)

When a CTRL P is entered the console is placed in the console 1/0 mode. (unless the
console mode switch is in the LOCAL/DISABLE or REMOTE/DISABLE position).

CARRIAGE RETURN (CR)

When a carriage return is entered a console command line is terminated.

3.10

COMMAND QUALIFIERS AND DEFAULTS

Qualifiers are entered as part of a command line and further
define the basic console command. Defaults are supplied by the
console software when the operator does not exercise the option of
entering a qualifier.
The defaults can be changed by using the
set default console command.
The following paragraphs describe the qualifiers and defaults for
address and data arguments; qualifiers and defaults for address
type, data length, and numeric argument defaults; and a qualifier
to operate on multiple sequential addresses.

3-33

3.10.1

Qualifiers For Address Type

Qualifiers for address type are used within a command line. These
qualifiers specify the type of address argument as virtual,
physical, or register address. The qualifiers for the respective
types are:
/VIRTUAL
/PHYSICAL
/IDBUS
/VBUS
/GENERAL
/INTERNAL
/CONSOLE
Example
To examine virtual address 1234, type:
>>>EXAMINE/VIRTUAL 8000E3FC
The system responds by displaying the contents of that address
P 0002E3FC OOOOABCD
>>>
Some register addresses have mnemonic names that are unique.
Therefore, the /GENERAL qualifier need not be specified when
mnemonic addresses such as PC or SP are referenced.
Example
To examine the PC, the operator enters either of the
statements:

following

>>>EXAMINE/GENERAL PC
or
>>> E PC
The system responds by displaying the contents of the PC.
G OOOOOOOF 00000001
>>>
If a console command references a nonexistent virtual address, the
execution of that command is aborted. An error message is then
typed at the console terminal.

3-34

3.10.2

Defaults For Address Types

The console applies a default for address type to any command that
requires an address argument and does not contain an address
qualifier. The default is set by using the SET DEFAULT command.
Example
>>> SET DEFAULT VIRTUAL
>>>
After executing this command the console defaults to virtual
addressing for any console command that requires an address
argument but does not have an address qualifier.
With virtual default set, the command EXAMINE 1234 results in
contents of virtual address 1234 being typed on the terminal.

3.10.3

the

Qualifiers For Data Length

Qualifiers for data length are used within a command line to
specify the length of the data quantity associated with the
command. The qualifiers for data length are:
BYTE
WORD
LONG
QUAD
Example
>>>EXAMINE/BYTE 1233
P

00001233

>>>
The data (FF) in
terminal.

the

byte

address

1233

typed

the

Since the general and processor registers are longword quantities,
all
register
references
default to longword data length,
regardless of the current setting of the data length default.

3-35

3.10.4

Defaults For Data Length

The console applies a default for data length to any command that
references data and does not contain a data length qualifier. The
default can be set through the SET DEFAULT command.
Example
The command
>>>SET DEFAULT WORD
>>>
results in the console defaulting to word data length.
>>>EXAMINE 1234
The system responds by displaying the contents of the word that
has its first byte at address 1234.
P 00001234 FFFF
>>>
All general and processor registers are longword quantities.
Therefore, all register references default to longword data
length, regardless of the current setting of the data length
default.

3-36

3.10.5

r..ocal Radix override

The current default radix can be overridden by including a local
radix override as a prefix to any numeric argument. A local radix
override is one of the following:
%0 (percent sign O) for octal arguments
>>>EXAMINE %07654
P OOOOOFAC FFFF
>>>
%X (percent sign X) for hexadecimal arguments
>>>EXAMINE %X7654
p 00000073124 177777
>>>
A local radix override must appear as the two leftmost characters
of the numeric argument it modifies, and it must not be separated
by spaces or tabs from that argument.
Defaults For Radix -- The console allows setting the radix default
to octal or hexadecimal for address and data arguments. The
console does not allow a decimal radix.
Example
>>>SET DEFAULT OCTAL
>>>
The default radix for address and data arguments is set to octal.

3-37

3.10.6

Default Address Facility

Every time an EXAMINE or DEPOSIT command is executed, the address
of the memory location following the location referenced by the
command is computed. The address of the next memory location is
the <default address>. An EXAMINE command that does not specify
an address references the next address by default.
The <default
address> is computed as follows:
<default address>
command> + n

= <address used by last EXAMINE or DEPOSIT

where n

for
for
for
for

1
2
4
8

byte references
word references
longword references
quadword references

The following example shows a sequence of console commands and the
value taken by the computed default <address>. Note that the next
address is data length dependent, since a byte reference advances
the default address by 1, while a longword reference advances the
default address by 4.
Example (all numbers are octal)
Command

Default address after execution

>>>EXAMINE/BYTE 1234
p 00001234 78
>>>EXAMINE/WORD (uses default address)

1235

p 00001235 3456
>>>EXAMINE/LONG (uses default address)

1237

p 00001237 FFFFFF12
>>>EXAMINE RO

1243

G 00000000 00000010
>>>EXAMINE

G 00000001 00002000
>>>EXAMINE Rll

G OOOOOOOB 04000000
>>>EXAMINE

Rl2

G OOOOOOOC OOOOlCOO
>>>EXAMINE PC

Rl3

3-38

G OOOOOOOF 00000001
>>>EXAMINE

RO
•

G 00000000. 00000010

>>>
Note that the <default address> following a PC reference is RO.

3.10.6.1

Specifying Defaults For Address -

The symbol (+) can be used as an address argument in a DEPOSIT or
EXAMINE command to represent the <default address>. This symbol
permits depositing to (or examining) successive locations without
typing the address argument for commands after the first deposit.
Example
To load a program starting at address 12345, the following
DEPOSIT commands can be used:
>>>DEPOSIT

12345

987654

>>>DEPOSIT

12345

>>>DEPOSIT

6543

>>>
Each DEPOSIT command, after the first, writes the <data> into the
next successive memory location. This same technique can be used
with the EXAMINE command.
>>>EXAMINE 12345
p

00012345 00987654

00012349 00012345

0001234D 00006543

>>>EX +
>>>EX +
>>>

3-39

3.10.6.2

Last Address Notation •

The last address argument referenced (virtual, physical, register)
by an EXAMINE or DEPOSIT command is denoted by an asterisk (*).
The <last address> may be used as an argument to an EXAMINE or
DEPOSIT command by typing an asterisk in place of the address
argument.
Example
>>>EXAMINE 1234
p 00001234 12345678
The contents of location 1234 is displayed.
If the next command issued is:
>>>DEPOSIT

* FFFF

The number FFFF is loaded into location 1234.
>>>EXAMINE *
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
>>>
Examines and deposits of general and processor registers replace
the <last address> with the register address. Mnemonic register
names are translated into register addresses by the console.

3-40

3.10.7

NEXT Qualifier

Syntax -- Command/NEXT [:<COUNT>]
The <count> argument specifies the number of additional executions
of the command to be performed after the initial execution of the
command. The default value for <count> is one.
The radix for
<count> is octal or hexadecimal, depending on the radix set
previously in the SET DEFAULT command.
Example
The command
>>>EXAMINE/BYTE 12345/NEXT:2
p 00012345 54
p 00012346 76
p 00012347 98
is evaluated by the console as follows:
1.

Initially the console applies default values.

The command, with applied defaults, is executed. The contents
of location 12345 are displayed, and the <default address> is
updated to 12346.

The qualifier /NEXT is now evaluated. The console repeats the
operation specified by the command the number of times
indicated by the <count> argument.
Each execution of the
command uses the <default address> for its address argument,
then updates the <default address>.
In
this
example,
locations 12345 and 12346 are displayed and the final value of
the <default address> is 12347.

3-41

Example
If the command
>>>EXAMINE/NEXT:2
00012348 01234500
P 0001234C 00654300
P 00012350 FFFFFFOO

is entered (following the command in the previous example) the
contents of locations 12348, 1234C, and 12350 are displayed. The
default is longword. Since the EXAMINE command does not contain
an address argument, the initial execution of the command uses the
current <default address> (which was 12347 following the command
in the previous example).
When the qualifier /NEXT is used to examine or deposit
general registers, the next register after PC is RO.

multiple

Example
The command
>>>EXAMINE/NEXT:5 Rl3
G 00000000 FOFOFOFO
G OOOOOOOE 8COOOOOO
G OOOOOOOF 00000001
G 00000000 00000010
G 00000001 00002000
G 00000002 00000800
>>>
results in the contents of Rl3, SP,
displayed (in that order).

3-42

PC,

RO,

Rl,

and

being

>>>EXAMINE/BYTE 12345/NEXT:2
p 00012345 54
p 00012346 76
p 00012347 98
>>>EXAMINE/WORD 12345/NEXT:2
p 00012345 7654
p 00012347 0098
p 00012349 2345
>>>
The preceding commands are used to examine
same location.

3.11

the

contents

the

COMMAND REPEAT FACILITY

The command repeat facility is primarily a maintenance aid.
Commands are executed repeatedly so that CPU logic involved with
the commands can be tested with an oscilloscope.
Example
>>>REPEAT EXAMINE 1234
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234 OOOOFFFF
P 00001234AI IC OOOOFFFF
This results in the content
examined and displayed.

location

1234

being

repeatedly

Once initiated, repeated execution continues until terminated
the entry of a CTRL C (Al IC) on the console keyboard.

3-43

3.12

COMMAND LINK FACILITY

The console's command link facility provides a means for multiple
commands to be linked into a single executable list of commands.
Once a list of linked commands is constructed, the list can be
executed once or repeatedly.

3.12.1

LINK Command Operation

The LINK command puts the console in the link mode.
The desired
commands are then entered. The LINK command is entered only as
the first command of a command string. Commands to be linked are
entered one to a line, with each command line terminated by a
<CR>. The console then returns a link mode input prompt (<<<)
requesting the next command. The link operation is terminated by
entering a CTRL C (Al IC) on the console.
As the command string is entered, the commands are stored on a
dedicated sector on the diskette (RXOl). When the command string
is executed, the string is treated as an indirect command file
(the command is retrieved, parsed, and executed, then the next
command is retrieved, parsed, etc.).
Once the input of a list of linked commands has been terminated,
no further commands can be added to the commands already linked.
The linked commands are executed by entering a PERFORM command.
The console does not execute commands being linked until a PERFORM
command is issued.
The command string can be executed once or repeatedly.
When the
PERFORM command is entered after the CTRL C (Al IC) the linked
commands are executed once.
However, when PERFORM is entered
prior to and after the CTRL C (Al IC), the first PERFORM command
becomes a part of the command list and the linked command list is
repeated until a second CTRL C (Al IC) is entered.
If a linked command is entered incorrectly, the console outputs an
error message when the command containing the syntactic error is
executed. Typing a CTRL U (Al IU) will reject the current command
line.

3-44

3.12.2

Link Facility Usage

Syntax

LINK <CR>
COMMAND <CR>
COMMAND <CR>
«"I IC>

Response

Dependent on command list.

Example
It is desired to repeatedly examine the contents of a device
register after a CPU initialize. The sequence of commands is as
follows.
>>> LINK

The link mode is entered.

<<< INITIALIZE

An initialize command is
entered.

<<< EXAMINE/LONG 20002008

Examine command is entered
into string (examining MBA
status register).

<<< PERFORM

Perform is entered prior to
linking termination.

<<< "C

The linking command is
terminated.

>>> PERFORM

Initiates execution.

>>> p 20002008 00070000

Command string executed
continuously.

>>> p 20002008 00070000

3-45

3.13

CONSOLE I/0 MODE ESCAPE

The console I/0 mode escape sequence causes the console to move
from console I/0 mode to program I/O mode. To escape to program
I/0 enter
>>> SET TERMINAL PROGRAM

Console commands START, CONTINUE, and NEXT also enable program I/O
mode.
The program I/0 mode escape sequence causes the console to change
from program I/0 mode to console I/0 mode. To escape to console
I/0 mode enter
"'I IP
The CTRL P (Al IP) is not recognized by the console if the console
power switch on the console panel is in the REMOTE DISABLE or
LOCAL DISABLE position.

3.14

REMOTE CONSOLE ACCESS COMMAND SET

A set of commands is included in the console command language for
accessing the console from a remote terminal. The command set for
remote access has the following:
1.

Talk mode -- provides communication between local
terminal operators.

and

remote

Copy control -- permits suppressing or enabling typeout on the
local terminal while a remote operator is in control.

Transfer control
permits transferring control
console between the local and remote operators.

the

Echo control -- provides control of the echo of characters
the remote terminal while in talk mode.

Error message suppressor
carrier error messages
remote line.

a method of suppressing lost
caused by a loss of carrier on the

A printout of the remote console command help file is contained in
Appendix L.

3-46

3.14.1

Enable Talk Mode Command

Syntax -- ENABLE <blank> TALK <CR>
Description -- The ENABLE TALK command places the console into
talk mode.
While in talk mode, characters ty~ed on the remote
keyboard are typed on the local terminal, and vice versa.
The
console does not echo characters back to the originating keyboard,
unless the talk mode echo feature is enabled.
Console commands
are not recognized while in talk mode.
Talk mode is terminated by typing the escape character, CTRL P
(Al IP), on either the local or remote keyboard. When talk mode is
terminated, console I/0 mode is enabled. When the talk mode is
entered, the console enables the remote serial interface and sends
the data terminal ready signal to the data set. All terminal I/0
to the CPU is disabled while in talk mode.
Response
>>> ENABLE TALK

Al IP
>>>

3-47

3.14.2

ENABLE/DISABLE ECHO Command

Syntax -- (ENABLE !

DISABLE) <blank> ECHO <CR>

Description -- With the ENABLE ECHO command the console echoes
characters input from either the remote or local keyboards while
in talk mode. The DISABLE ECHO command suppresses the echo of
characters typed from the local or remote keyboards.
ENABLE and DISABLE ECHO commands do not have any effect until talk
mode is entered. A DISABLE ECHO is entered each time the console
control panel rotary keyswitch is put
in
the
LOCAL
or
LOCAL/DISABLE position, and upon power up of the console.
Response
>>> ENABLE ECHO

>>> DISABLE ECHO

3.14.3

ENABLE/DISABLE LOCAL COPY Command

Syntax -- (ENABLE !

DISABLE) <blank> LOCAL <blank> COPY <CR>

Description -- With the ENABLE LOCAL COPY command
terminal prints a copy of all output directed to
terminal. The DISABLE LOCAL COPY command disables
terminal from getting a copy of output directed to
terminal.

the local
the remote
the local
the remote

Local copy disable is entered each time the console keyswitch is
turned to the LOCAL, REMOTE, or LOCAL/DISABLE position. Local
copy enable is entered each time the console control panel rotary
keyswitch is placed in the REMOTE/DISABLE position.
Response
>>> ENABLE LOCAL COPY
>>> DISABLE LOCAL COPY

3-48

3.14.4

ENABLE LOCAL CONTROL Command

Syntax -- ENABLE <blank> LOCAL <blank> CONTROL <CR>
Description -- An ENABLE LOCAL CONTROL command, entered at the
remote terminal (when the console keyswitch is in the REMOTE
position), transfers control of the console to the local terminal.
This permits the local operator to take control of the console and
the CPU, while the remote link is maintained. The remote operator
can regain control of the console by typing CTRL P (Al IP).
An ENABLE LOCAL CONTROL command entered from the local terminal
has no effect. Local control is enabled when the console control
panel rotary keyswitch is placed in the LOCAL or LOCAL/DISABLE
position.
Response
>>> ENABLE LOCAL CONTROL

>>>

3-49

3.14.5

ENABLE/DISABLE CARRIER ERROR Command

Syntax -- (ENABLE !

DISABLE <blank> CARRIER <blank> ERROR <CR>

Description -- With the ENABLE CARRIER ERROR command the message
?CARRIER LOST is printed each time a loss of carrier on the remote
line is detected.
Response
>>> ENABLE CARRIER ERROR

CARRIER LOST

>>>
The DISABLE CARRIER ERROR command causes the console to inhibit
the
carrier
lost
message.
An
ENABLE CARRIER ERROR is
automatically done whenever the console keyswitch is placed in the
LOCAL or LOCAL/DISABLE position.

3.15

CONSOLE ERROR MESSAGES

All console error messages are prefixed by a question mark to
distinguish them from informational messages. A description of
the console error messages is contained in Appendix E. To obtain
a set from your VAX-11/785 enter
>>>@ERROR.HLP

3-50

CHAPTER 4
DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR

4.1

GENERAL

The VAX diagnostic supervisor controls the operation of most
diagnostic programs used on VAX-11/785 systems. This chapter
explains methods for booting the diagnostic supervisor, details
the setup for running diagnostics, and includes instructions for
disk formatting.
This chapter is intended as an introduction to the diagnostic
supervisor.
It is by no means an exhaustive treatment of the
subject.
For more detailed information on
the
diagnostic
supervisor, see VAX Diagnostic System User's Guide (EK-VXllD-UG)
and DS780 Diagnostic System Technical Description (EK-DS780-TD).

4.2
4.2.1

BOOTING THE DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR
Environments

The diagnostic supervisor can run in two environments.
In the
first, user mode, the VAX/VMS operating system must be running.
The other environment, standalone mode, requires that VMS not be
running on the system.
Whether the diagnostic supervisor is
booted in user mode or standalone mode depends upon the diagnostic
that will be run.
The environment necessary for a specific diagnostic is defined by
the diagnostic's level.
The diagnostic levels that require the
diagnostic supervisor are 3, 2R, and 2.
Table 4-1 lists the
environment for each of these levels. The level of any diagnostic
can be found in Section 2.1 of EVNDX.
Table 4-1

Diagnostic Supervisor Environments
LEVEL

ENVIRONMENT

Stand-alone
User Mode
Either

2R
2

4-1

4.2.2

Boot Procedures

4.2.2.1

Stand-alone Mode -

The diagnostic supervisor can be booted from either the system
disk or the diagnostic supervisor diskette when it is to run in
stand-alone mode.
Type the following to boot
system disk.

the

diagnostic

supervisor

from

the

>>> B SRn

where

R
n

designates the diagnostic supervisor
designates the type of disk
is the number of the disk drive

To boot the diagnostic from the diagnostic supervisor
place diskette RX7 in the drive and type the following.

diskette,

>>> B
The DEFBOO.CMD file on
diagnostic supervisor.

4.2.2.2

diskette

RX7

loads

and

starts

the

User Mode -

The diagnostic supervisor is booted from the system disk when it
is to run in user mode. To boot the diagnostic supervisor with
VMS running, log into the field service account or SET DEFAULT to
SYS$MAINTENANCE and run ESSAA.
USERNAME: FIELD
PASSWORD: SERVICE
$RUN ESSAA
or, from any account
$SET DEFAULT SYS$MAINTENANCE
$RUN ESSAA
Table 4-2 is a summary
supervisor.

methods

4-2

for

booting

the

diagnostic

Table 4-2

Diagnostic Supervisor Boot Procedures

LOAD DEVICE

STAND-ALONE MODE

USER MODE

System disk

>>> B SRn

$SET DEFAULT SYS$MAINTENANCE
$RUN ES SAA

DS>
DS>
Diskette

not used

>>> B

DS>

4.3

RUNNING DIAGNOSTICS

After the diagnostic supervisor has been booted, some setup work
must be done before running a diagnostic. This involves the
diagnostic supervisor ATTACH and SELECT commands.

4.3.1

ATTACHing A Device

The diagnostic supervisor keeps track of devices, drivers, system
addresses, TR and BR interrupt priority levels by creating a
parameter table from information received from the operator. This
table is created when the operator issues ATTACH commands to the
diagnostic supervisor.
The diagnostic supervisor can access a device only when it knows
about each interface between the device and the CPU. Table 4-3
lists the commands used to attach the CPU, various interfaces, and
several disk devices.
NOTE
If a <CR> is typed after ATTACH, the operator will be
prompted for the information needed. All information in
Table 4-3 is given in this format. The alternative is to
include everything on one line, with spaces separating
each piece of information.

4-3

Table 4-3

ATTACH Commands
CPU

DS>
Device type?
Device link?
Device name?
G-f loating instructions?
H-floating instructions?
WCS last address?
Accelerator type?

ATT
KA785
SB!
KAO
Yes
Yes
lFFF
0/1 (O=no accelerator)

'CONTROLLERS

DS>
Device type?
Device link?
Device name?
TR?
BR?

UNIBUS
( DW780)

MAS SB US
(RH780)

ATT
DW780
HUB
DWn
3

ATT
RH780
HUB
RHn
8

UNIBUS DISK ADAPTER
( UDA50)
DS>
Device type?
Device link?
Device name?
UDAIP?
Vector?
BR?
Burst rate?

ATT
UDA50
DWO
DUA
772150
154
5
5

4-4

Table 4-3

ATTACH Commands (Cont)
DEVICES

DS>
Device type?
Device link?
Device name?

RA60

UNIBUS
RASO

RAS!

RMOS

RP07

ATT
RA60
DUA
DUAO

ATT
RASO
DUA
DUAO

ATT
RASl
DUA
DUAO

ATT
RMOS
RHO
DRAl

ATT
RP07
RHO
DRAO

When attaching UNIBUS disks,
make attachments in this order:

When attaching MASSBUS disks,
make attachments in this order:
CPU
RH7SO
disk

CPU
DW7SO
UDASO
disk

4.3.2

MAS SB US

SELECTing A Device

A device must be selected before it can be tested.
to run a CPU diagnostic, type at the DS> prompt:
DS> SELECT KAO
DS> SET TRACE
DS> RUN EVKA*

EVKAB
EVKAC
EVKAD
EVKAE

For

example,

!Do this to see the titles of tests being run

VAX Architectural Instr
VAX Floating-Point Inst
VAX Compatibility Mode Inst
VAX Privileged Architectural Instr

The device name from the ATTACH command (see Table 4-3) is used as
the name in the SELECT command.

4-5

4.3.3

Summary

The actions required to run a diagnostic
following list.

are

summarized

the

procedure

used

Determine the diagnostic to be run.

Check in EVNDX for the diagnostic's level.

Boot the diagnostic supervisor.
depends on the diagnostic's level.

Attach the CPU.

Attach the device to be tested and its interfaces.

Select the device.

Run the diagnostic.

4-6

The

boot

4.4

DISK FORMATTERS

Table 4-4 lists disk formatters and their levels.
Table 4-4

Disk Formatters

NAME

LEVEL

FORMATS THESE DISKS

EVRAC
EVRLB

RMOS and RP07
RASO, RA81, and RA60

To run a formatter, do the following.
1.

Determine the correct environment
diagnostic supervisor.

(Table

4-4)

and

Attach the device to be formatted and its interfaces.

Select the device.

Run the formatter.

run

NOTE
Formatting will destroy data on the disk.
Be sure that
formatting is desired.
DIGITAL maintenance personnel will
format the disk, if the customer desires.

4-7

the

CHAPTER 5
PERIPHERAL DEVICES OPERATING INFORMATION

5.1

GENERAL

This chapter contains brief descriptions of the console and
peripheral equipment typically used in VAX-11/785 systems. The
description for
each
includes,
as
applicable,
equipment
specifications,
operating controls and indicators, operating
procedures, and customer care and maintenance.
NOTE
Refer to Table 1-2 for a list of manuals containing
detailed information about the following equipment.

5.2

LA120 CONSOLE TERMINAL

The LA120 is a smart bidirectional 7x7 dot matrix impact printer.
It contains a 1000-character input buffer and has a maximum print
rate of 180 characters per second.

5.2.1

LA120 Specifications

Table 5-1 lists the specifications for the LA120.

5-1

Table 5-1

LA120 Specifications

Printer

Printing technique

Impact dot matrix, smart bidirectional

Print matrix (width by height)

7 by 7

Maximum print speed

180 CPS

Horizontal slew speed

60 IPS

Single linefeed time

33 ms

Vertical slew speed

7.5 IPS

Paper feed

Pin-feed, tractor drive

Paper type

Fanfold, up to six parts (see paper requirements)

Forms length

1 to 168 lines

Vertical pitch (lines per inch)
Horizontal pitch (characters
per inch)

2.3.4.6.8.12

180 CPS

10.12.13.2, 16.5

90 CPS

5.6.6.6.8.25

Maximurn line length
(varies with horizontal pitch}

5 CPI

66 columns

6 CPI

79 columns

6.6 CPI

87 columns

8 CPI

108 columns

10 CPI

132 columns

12 CPI

158 columns

13.2 CPI

174 columns

16.5 CPI

217 columns

Margins

Left. right. top. bottom

Tabs

217 horizontal. 168 vertical. from keyboard or line

Forms storage

True {'.lonvolatile memory (no batteries)

Positioning commands

Horizontal and vertical. absolute and
relative

Character set

ASCII upper/lowercase set

National character sets
Standard
Optional

United States
{ United
Kingdom

{
5-2

Finland
Sweden
Norway

Denmark
Germany
France

Table 5-1

LA120 Specifications (Cont)

APL character set

Optional

Other printer features

Paper out and cover open interlocks.
manual and automatic last character
view. selectable auto new line. self-test.
status message. 4-digit numeric display
used as column counter and to set
parameters. factory stored form setup
( 10 CPI. 6 LPI. 66 lines per form tab
stops every eight columns. etc.)

Keybollrd Specifications
Keyboard

Typewriter style with multi-key
rollover

Selectable auto LF

Standard

Optional numeric keypad

18 keys including 4 function keys

Feature selection

Keyboard entry to nonvolatile
memory

Other keyboard features

Local form feed key. local line feed
key. auto repeat on all· alphanumeric
keys. and selectable keyclick

Communication Specific.tiona
Data transfer

Serial. asynchronous

Baud rates (BPS)

50. 7 5.110.134.134.5.150,300,600.
1200.1800.2400.4800,7200.9600.

Split speeds (BPS)

600 or 1200 receive. with 7 5 or 150
transmit; 2400 or 4800 receive. with
300 or 600 transmit.

Parity

Odd. even. or none (8th bit mark or
space transmitted. or data bits only)

Input buffer

1024 characters standard.
characters optional

Interface

Full EIA standard (includes auto answer/disconnect)

Physic.I Specific.tiona
Dimensions
Width

69.9 cm (27.5 in)

Height

85. 1 cm (33.5 in)

Depth

61.0 cm (24.0 in)

Weight
Uncrated

46.4 kg (, 02 lb)

Shipping

63.7 kg (140 lb)

5-3

4096

Table 5-1

LA120 Specifications (Cont)

Phyaic•I Specificlltiona CCont)

Power
Transformer power supply
Voltage
Frequency

87 to 128 V
60 Hz+ 1 Hz

Switcher power supply
Voltage
Frequency

90-128 V or 180-256 V
47-63 Mhz

Input current
Heat dissipation - printing

4.2 A max. at 115 V
440Wmax.

Temperature
Operating

10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)

Nonoperating

-40° to 66°C (-40° to 151°F)

Relative Humidity
Operating

10 to 90 percent with a maximum
wet bulb temperature of 28°C (82° Fl
and a minimum dewpoint of 2°C
(36°F). noncondensing

Nonoperating

5 to 95 percent. noncondensing

P•per Requirements
General

Continuous. fanfold. pin-feed forms

Width

7.6 to 37.8 cm (3 to 14-7/8 in)

Hole spacing

12.7 mm ± 0.25 mm (0.500 in ±
0.010 in) non-accumulative over 5
cm (2in)

Hole diameter

3.81 to 4.06 mm (0.150 to 0.160 in)

Forms thickness
Single part

15 lb paper minimum. 0.25 mm
(0.010 in) card stock maximum

Multipart

Up to 6 parts (see notes). 0.50 mm
(0.020 in) maximum

5-4

5.2.2

LA120 Controls And Indicators

The LA120 keyboard and control panel contains a four-digit numeric
display,
several control keys that do not transmit printing
characters, and seven indicator LEDs. See Figure 5-1.

NUMERIC DISPLAY

Figure 5-1

5-5

LA120 Keyboard

Table 5-2

LA120 Controls

Key

Function

SHIFT

When used with a character producing key, the
key's uppercase character is transmitted. (The
lowercase character is normally transmitted.)

CTRL

When used with a character producing key, the
key's control character is transmitted. Use of the
CTRL key is generally expressed as follows.
CTRL/K = Press and hold the "CTRL" key and
press the letter "K" key on the keyboard.

CAPS LOCK

When set, causes the alphabet keys to transmit uppercase characters regardless of the SHIFT key.
Does not affect the number or symbol keys.

LINE/LOCAL

Changes the LA 120 to the ON LINE mode or LOCAL
mode as displayed by the indicators.

LOCAL
LINE FEED

Advances the paper one line at a time.

LOCAL
FORM FEED

Advances the paper to the top-of-form position, or to
the top margin (if the top margin is set).

VIEW

Allows the operator to view the last character printed if the last-character-view feature is disabled.

5-6

Table 5-3

LA120 Indicators

Indicator

Function

ON LINE

The LA 120 is on-line. The terminal transmits key·
board characters to the CPU and receives printer
characters. Characters typed on the keyboard are
transmitted back to the printer by the program.

LOCAL

The LA 120 keyboard is locally connected to the
printer. The terminal is off-line and does not receive
or transmit characters.

ALT CHAR
SET

The alternate character set is enabled (in terminals
optionally equipped with a foreign language charac·
ter set).

CTS •

Data transmission is enabled (clear to send).

DSR •

The modem is in data mode (data set ready).

SETUP

Blinks when the LA 120 is in the SETUP mode.

PAPER OUT

Blinks when the LA 120 is disabled by one of the fol·
lowing conditions.
• The printer is out of paper.
• The cover is open.
• The print head is jammed.

NUMERIC
DISPLAY

During normal operation, indicates the horizontal
column position of the print head. In SETUP mode,
the vertical line position is also indic!lted by press·
ing the SHIFT key.

• Used in terminals connected to a modem.

5.2.2.1

SETUP Functions -

Place the terminal in LOCAL mode to avoid transmitting
while making changes in SETUP mode.

characters

In SETUP mode, the numeric display shows the current column
number.
When the SHIFT key is pressed, the display shows the
current vertical line number.

5-7

The following procedure describes the two methods of entering
exiting SETUP mode.
1.

and

To enter SETUP mode, press and hold the CTRL key and press the
SETUP key.
Release both keys.
The SETUP light flashes,
indicating that the terminal is in SETUP mode.
Make the desired changes.

To exit SETUP mode, press the SETUP key and release
SETUP light stops flashing.

it.

The

To enter SETUP mode, press and hold the SETUP key.
light flashes.

The

SETUP

light

Make the desired changes.
Release the SETUP key to exit SETUP
stops flashing.

mode.

The

Most of the keys on the console keyboard have SETUP functions.
The functions for the top row of keys and some other commonly used
features are briefly described in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4
Key

LA120 SETUP Functions

Name

Function

TAB SET

Sets horizontal tab at the current column. When
used with SHIFT, sets vertical tab on the current
line.

TAB CLEAR

Clears horizontal tab at the current column. When
used with SHIFT, clears vertical tab on the current
line.

CLEAR All

Clears all tabs, horizontal and vertical.

TOF

Resets the vertical line counter to line 1. Top-of·
form (TOF) defines the first line after the perforation when fanfold paper or forms are loaded.
If the top margin is set, the paper moves to the
top margin (the first printable li(\e) when the form
feed command is sent by the computer or LOCAL
FORM FEED is pressed.

To avoid having to set top-of-form each time the
printer is turned on or the paper is changed,
press LOCAL FORM FEED before turning off the
system or the printer.

TOP !LEFT

Sets the left margin at the current column. When
used with SHIFT, sets the top margin on the current line.

5-8

Table 5-4

LA120 SETUP Functions (Cont)

Key

Name

Function

BOTIRT
MAR

Sets right margin at the current column. When
used with SHIFT, sets bottom margin on the current line.

MAR CLEAR

Clears left and right margins. When used with
SHIFT, clears top and bottoM margins.

STATUS

Prints a message that shows the state of the currently selected SETUP features. (See the LA 120
User Guide tor a description of the letter key functions given by the printout.)

STORE I RECALL Cancels all temporary SETUP features and recalls the permanently stored features. When used
with SHIFT, perraanently stores the currently selected SETUP features.

BAUD

Press once to view the current transmit and receive baud rate in the numeric display. Pressing
the key again changes the baud rate until the desired rate is indicated in the numeric display.
This value should not be changed because the
CPU responds only to a fixed rate. The factory
setting is for 300 baud. The CPU is switch selectable to 1200, 2400, or 9600 baud but should not
be changed except by authorized service personnel.

Volume

Press once to view the current setting in the numeric display. Press again to set the desired bell
and keyclick volume as indicated in the numeric
display.
1 = High volume
2 = Low volume

Keyclick

Press once to view the current setting in the numeric display. Press again to enable or disable
the keyclick feature as indicated in the numeric
display.
1 = Enabled
O =Disabled

View Last
Character

Press once to view the current setting in the numeric display. Press again to enable or disable
the last character view feature as indicated in the
numeric display.
1 = Enabled
O =Disabled

5-9

5.2.3

LA120 Operating Instructions

5.2.3.1

Loading Paper Or Forms -

The LA120 accepts sprocket-fed, multiple-part paper or forms
ranging in width from 3 to 14-7/8 inches. The general procedure
for loading paper or forms is as follows.
1.

Turn the printer off, then open the cover.

Loosen the left and right tractor adjusting screws.

Position the left tractor feed pins approximately two inches
from the left sideplate and tighten the left tractor adjusting
screw. This provides optimum margins for 132-column paper.
It may be necessary to readjust the left pins when using
printed forms.

Open the printer cover. Open both tractor covers and move the
print head adjustment lever away from the paper (Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2
5.

LA120 Print Head Adjustment

Place the paper on the floor between the legs of the LA120
(Figure 5-3) and align the leading edge of the paper so it is
parallel to the paper slot. Align the left sprocket holes of
the paper with the left tractor.

5-10

AC
FUSE

LEFT EDGE PARALLEL
TO TRACTOR FEED PINS

Figure 5-3

MA.·2313

LA120 Paper Alignment

Feed the paper up through the paper slot.
Align the left
sprocket holes over the feed pins. Close the left tractor
cover (Figure 5-4).
TO FEED PINS
2"

LEFT TRACTOR
ADJUSTING KNOB

Figure 5-4

LEFT TRACTOR
ADJUSTING KNOB

LA120 Tractor Adjustment

5-11

MA.·2308

Making sure that the paper is straight, align the right
sprocket holes over the feed pins and close the right tractor
cover.
If the paper pulls against the pins or bows in the
middle, loosen the right tractor adjusting knob and adjust the
right tractor.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the tractor adjusting knobs.

Reset the print head adjustment lever for the thickness of the
paper or forms.

Set top-of-form (Figure 5-5). Press and hold the SETUP key
and press the number 4 (TOF) key to reset the line counter to
1. Using the paper adjust knob, set the paper perforation one
character height above the line indicator on the print head.
The paper adjust knob is pushed in to make fine vertical
adjustments.

NOTE
To avoid having to set top-of-form each time the printer
is turned on or the paper is changed, press LOCAL FORM
FEED before turning off the system or printer or opening
the cover.

FORM
PERFORATION
TOP OF

PRINT~>----

-----ff\11' "
LINE
INDICATOR

MA·2298

Figure 5-5

Setting Top-of-Form on LA120

5-12

NOTES
1.

Multipart forms with 3- or 4-prong
both margins are recommended.

Stapled forms are not recommended and may cause damage
to the print head, tractors, or other parts of the
machine, voiding the warranty.

Multipart forms may have only one card part.
must be the last part.

Multipart carbonless forms of up to six parts may be
used.
Ribbon
must
be used on the top copy;
first-surface impact paper is not recommended.

Dot or line glue margins are acceptable if the glue is
on one margin only.
Line glue on both margins
prevents air from escaping,
resulting
in
poor
impressions.

Split forms with each side containing a different
thickness or number of sheets are not recommended.

5.2.4
5.2.4.1

margin

crimps

The card

LA120 Customer Care And Maintenance
Power Switch, Fuse, And Cover Interlock -

The console terminal is plugged into a switched ac outlet of the
system power control. The normal position for the ac power switch
is ON to allow the terminal to turn on and off with the system. A
safety interlock is provided to prevent printer operation when the
cover is opened. The ac power switch and line fuse are located in
the lower left-hand corner of the front panel below the keyboard.
The line fuse is a 250-volt slo-blo, rated at 3 amps.

5-13

5.2.4.2

Ribbon Installation -

The LA120 ribbon provides from six to eight hours of continuous
printing.
When the print contrast becomes too light, the ribbon
may be turned over for one or two more hours of printing.
It
should then be replaced as follows.
1.

Turn the printer off and open the top cover.

Move the carriage adjustment lever away from the paper (Figure
5-6).
RIBBON REVERSING FORKS

r@
1

'il n

LIGHTER CARRIAGE f
ADJUSTMENT
LEVER

Figure 5-6

MA3381

LA120 Ribbon Installation

Wind the old ribbon on one spool and remove it.

Save the empty spool and discard the old ribbon.

Attach the end hook of the new ribbon to the empty spool.

Wind ten turns of ribbon on the empty spool, making sure
the ribbon rivet is on the empty spool.

Place the full spool on the left spool shaft (which turns
freely) and turn it clockwise until it drops into position.

Thread the new ribbon around the print head and
through the ribbon reversing forks (Figure 5-6).

Check that the ribbon rivet is on the empty spool
between the empty spool and the ribbon reversing fork.

5-14

that

guides
or

and
is

5.2.4.3

Print Impression Adjustment -

.1.

Open the printer top cover.

Move the carriage adjustment (Figure 5-6)
lever toward
paper and make light contact with the paper or form.

Manually move the print head to the side to check for smudging
or paper rippling.

Close the cover and type several characters.

If smudging or rippling occurs, open the cover and move the
head adjustment lever slightly away from the paper and check
it again. Repeat steps 3 and 4.
CAUTION
Only
DIGITAL
recommended
ribbons
(part
no.
36-12153-01) should be used in the LA120. Using
ribbons other than that specified may damage the print
head and will void the warranty.

5-15

the

5.2.4.4

Error Display -

When the LA120 is turned on, it runs several internal tests.
Any
error results are viewed in the numeric display as shown in Table
5-5. If the error cannot be cleared, an authorized service
engineer should be notified.
Table 5-5
Display
Indicates
0 (flashing)
1 (flashing)
2 (flashing)
3 (flashing)
4 (flashing)
5 (flashing)
6 (flashing)
7 (flashing)
8 (flashing)
9 (flashing)
8888 (constant)

LA120 Error Display
Causes
Error at ROM address 0
Error at ROM address 2048
Error at ROM address 4096
Error at ROM address 6144
Error at ROM address 8192
Error at ROM address 10240
Reserved for future options
RAM diagnostic failure
Microprocessor failure
Nonvolatile memory failure
Coveropen.orpaperout
indication

Corrective
Action
Call for service
Call for service
Call for service
Call for service
Call for service
Call for service
Call for service
See note 1
See notes
Close cover.
Reload paper

NOTES
1. Turn LA120 oH then back on. If •n e"or indic•tion reappears. record indication
•nd call for service.
2. If the original problem was 11 flashing 9, check the stored SET-UP feature to
ensure that it has not been affected. The seff-test is an additional test (Part 2.
operator's chapter) which can be initiated by the operator. The test will help
determine H the problem is in the printer or in some other portion of the
communication system.
If you are unable to turn the printer on or H the printer appears to be fauhy, refer to
the operator's troubleshooting table. This table describes those things an operator
can check prior to requesting service.

5-16

5.2.4.5

Operator Troubleshooting -

Common problem symptoms, their possible
actions are listed in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6

causes,

and

corrective

LA120 Operator Troubleshooting
Possible Cause and Corrective
Action

.Symptom
LA 120 does not turn on
when printer power switch
set to ON

AC power cord is not plugged
into wall outlet or front of printer.
Plug in this cord.
Power is not coming from the
wall outlet. Check outlet with a
known working electrical device
(such as a lamp). If no power. call
your electrician.
AC line fuse blown; turn printer
off and have the fuse replaced. (See
Part 3 for fuse location.)

Characters do not print

Printer out of paper; load paper.
(See Part 3 for paper loading.)
Printer cover open or ajar. Close
cover.
Print head too far from paper:
readjust print head adjustment lever.
(See Part 3 for adjustment.)
Data set unplugged; plug it in.
Incorrect communication setup.

Light print

Print head too far from paper:
adjust print head adjustment lever.
Ribbon out of ink; turn ribbon
over or replace ribbon. (See Part 3
for ribbon replacement.)

NOTE
Turn the ribbon over aher 5 to 6 hours of continuous printing. Ribbon can be
turned over only once: then it must be replaced.

Paper does not advance

5-17

Paper not loaded properly; check
that the tractor covers are closed
and tht! feed holes are properly
aligned.
Feed holes torn: reload paper. If
paper pulls against the tractor pins
or bows in the middle. readjust the
right tractor.

Table 5-6

LA120 Operator Troubleshooting (Cont)
Possible C.use and Comtctive
Action

Symptom
Paper tearing on multipart
forms

Print head exerting too much
pressure on the paper; readjust the
print head adjustment lever.
Tractor incorrectly adjusted. If the
paper pulls against the tractor pins
or bows in the middle. readjust the
right tractor.
Paper not straight in printer; realign paper.

Print head jam or print head
does not move

Paper or print head jam; clear jam
and perform reloading paper/form
procedure in section 3 of this
chapter.
·

No keyboard or printer

Printer cover open or ajar when
printer is turned on (normally indicated by flashing 8888 and
PAPER OUT light); close cover.

Garbled or double characters.

Incorrect communication setup.
Ensure that your communication
setup is compatible with the equipment at the other end of the line.

5-18

5.3

RAGO DISK DRIVE

The RAGO disk drive is a removable media drive with a storage
capacity of 205 million bytes of lG-bit word data or 208 million
bytes of 18-bit word data. The drive operates on the standard
disk interface (SI).
The RAGO is sold with slides and is rack mountable.
disk drives may be mounted into each cabinet.

5.3.1

RAGO Specifications
Table 5-7

RAGO Performance Specifications

Oaaracteristics

Specifications

Data storage capacity
in 16 bit word format
in 18 bit word format

205 megabytes
208 megabytes

Head switch latency
Minimum
Maximum

lOms
14ms

Seek latency
One cylinder seek latency
Maximum seek latency
Average seek latency

6.67 ms
70.00ms
41.67 ms

Rotational latency
Disk speed
Maximum latency
Average latency

3600 RPM ±. 5%
16.66 ms
8.33 ms

Maximum start time

35 sec

Data transfer rate
Bit rate
Bit cell period

15.84 megabits/sec ±. 5%
63.13 nsec ± 5%

Unrecoverable data error rate

1in10••12 bits

Recoverable data error rate

I in 1O* *7 bits

Corrected data error rate

1 in 10••11 bits

Recoverable seek error rate

I misseek in Io• *6

5-19

three

Table 5-8

RA60 Physical Specifications

Oaaracteristics

Specifications (RA60 Dri•e Only)

Height

26.S2 centimeters

10.44 inches
Width

48.26 centimeters
19 inches

Depth

8S.09 centimeters
33. 7S inches

Weight (drive only)

68.9S kilograms
152 pounds

Height

106.30 centimeters
41.80 inches

Width

54.20 centimeters
21.30 inches

Depth

14.20 centimeters
36.00 inches

Weight (cabinet only)

90. 70 kilograms
200pounds

Shipping weight
one drive in cabinet

176.42 kilograms
389 pounds

Minimum door entrance
width required
for shipping crate

76.2 centimeters
30inches

Minimum service
clearance required
Front

91.4 centimeters
36 inches

Rear

91 ~4 centimeters .

36inches
Left side

No side access needed

Right side

No side access needed

5-20

Table 5-9

RA60 Environmental Limits Specifications

Chancteristic

Specifacation

Operating ranges:
Temperature

16°C (500F) to 40°C (104°F)

Temperature rate
of change

20°C/hour (36°F/hour)

Relative humidity

8.% to 80% with a maximum wet bulb temperature
of 26°C (78°F) and a minimum dew point of 2°C
(36°F)

Altitude

2438 meters
8000 feet

Air quality requirement

Less than 5 million particles of 0.5 micron per cubic foot of air

Nonoperating ranges:
shipping and storage
Temperature

-40°C (-40°F) to +66°C (+ 150°F)

Relative humidity

8% to 80% with no condensation

Altitude

9175 meters
30,000 feet

5-21

Table 5-10

RA60 AC Power Specifications

Characteristic

Specification

Voltage/Current
RA60-CA/CE
RA60-CD/CJ

Nominal: 120 volts ac/7 .5 amperes
Nominal: 240 volts ac/3.75 amperes

Voltage range/Frequency range
RA60-CA/CE
RA60-CD/CJ

90-128 volts ac/60 ±. 1 hz
180-256 volts ac/SO ±. 1 hz

Input power
RA60-CA/CE
RA60-CD/CJ

600 watts typical/800 watts worst case
600 watts typical/800 watts worst case

Power factor

Greater than 0.75

Maximum start current

190 amps RMS at 120 VAC for 1/2 ac cycle
95 amps RMS at 240 VAC for 1/2 ac cycle

5-22

5.3.2

RA60 Controls And Indicators

5.3.2.1

Operator Control Panel -

The RA60 operator control panel is located on
disk drive. See Figure 5-7.

front

f'ORTA
SWITCH AND INDICATOR

FAULT INDICATOR MD
l'ESET SWITCH
(RED)

Figure 5-7

the

(WHITE)

RA60 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

5-23

the

RUN/STOP Switch and Indicator
The RUN/STOP switch is a double-action push button.
When placed
in the RUN position (button in), the switch requests that the disk
spin up and load the heads. When placed in the STOP position
(button out), the heads are unloaded off the disk and the spindle
motor is stopped. The RUN/STOP light always reflects the physical
state of the disk spindle. When the light is on, it indicates
that the disk spindle is spinning. When the light is off,
it
indicates that the disk spindle is stopped.
If the drive is on line and operating when the switch is placed in
the STOP position, the drive will complete all outstanding write
operations commanded by the controller before spinning down.
If the RUN/STOP switch is in the IN position when power is applied
to the drive, it must be reset by releasing it and pushing it in
again to start the spin-up sequence.
FAULT Switch and Indicator
The FAULT switch and indicator performs a dual function. When the
FAULT light is off, the FAULT switch can be pushed to perform a
lamp test. When the FAULT light is on, it indicates that an error
condition exists within the RAGO.
The FAULT button is a momentary contact switch. When pushed the
first time, the switch causes the drive to go off-line.
In this
state, the drive assumes control of all front panel indicator
lights which blink to display a binary code indicating the type of
fault. Table 5-11 shows the hex fault codes that can be displayed
by the front panel indicators.
The blinking fault code will remain displayed until an attempt is
made to clear the fault by pushing the FAULT switch a second time.
If successful, the FAULT light will go off and the drive will
return to the available state.
If unsuccessful, the FAULT light
will remain on until the drive is repaired.

5-24

Table 5-11

RAGO Fault Identification Codes

Description
of Error

RUN
STOP

FAULT

READY

WRT
PROT

HEX
Code

Microcode
error (not
sent to
front panel)

•

off

Heads home
switch fa ult

•

off

Front panel
fault

•

off

Long spin-up
time fault

•

off

Bad servo
samples fault

•

off

Bad velocity
fault

•

off

Linear mode
fault

•

off

Retry on seek
fault

•

off

Lost servo
samples fault

•

off

Heads home
switch would
not open

•

off

SDI fault

•
•

off

Invalid SDI
level I
command

•

off

Master
processor
fault

•The run/stop switch may be on or off depending on the state of the drive.
5-25

UNIT/READY Plug and Indicator
The plastic cap labeled READY is both an indicator cap and a
removable unit address plug. The READY light will come on after
the RUN/STOP switch is pushed in and the drive has completed a
successful spin-up sequence.
The drive is ready to accept read
and write commands whenever the READY light is on.
The READY
light will go off when the drive performs seek operations.
The plastic READY cap is cam-coded to distinguish one drive from
another in multi-drive arrangements.
This unit address plug
determines the logical number that this drive presents to the
host.
Only numbers between 0 and 251 may be programmed into this
unit address plug to satisfy the requirements of the Mass Storage
Control Protocol.
WRITE PROT Switch and Indicator
The WRITE PROT switch is a double action push button with a
built-in indicator light. Push in the WRITE PROT switch to place
the drive in write protect mode and turn on the WRITE PROT light.
In this mode, the write circuits of the disk drive are disabled.
Release the WRITE PROT switch (OUT position) to enable
circuits and turn off the WRITE PROT light.

the

write

A and B Port Select Switches
The RA60 has two port select switches.
These double-action
switches (A and B) have built-in lights that indicate which drive
port is presently on line to the controller. See Table 5-12.
Table 5-12

RA60 A and B Port Select Switches

PORT SELECT
SWITCH
A
B

PORT AVAILABILITY

Dual-port programmable

OUT

Neither port available

5-26

5.3.3

RA60 Operating Instructions

5.3.3.1

Power On And Power Off -

Power to the disk drive is controlled by two circuit breakers.
One circuit breaker is on the power controller at the base of the
cabinet, and it controls power to all drives in that cabinet. The
other circuit breaker is on the back of the disk drive. These two
circuit breakers should normally be left in the ON position after
drive installation.
If both of these circuit breakers are on, the
drive will spin up whenever the RUN/STOP switch is pushed.
See
Figure 5-8.

POWER CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT BREAKER

CZ-0818

Figure 5-8

RA60 Drive Circuit Breakers

5-27

5.3.3.2

Disk Pack Loading And Unloading -

The RA60 must be loaded with an RA60 disk pack and then be brought
to the ready state before information can be stored or read. The
procedures for loading and unloading the disk pack are as follows.
Loading the Disk Pack
1.

Apply power by turning on the drive circuit breaker located at
the back of the drive.

Check that the RUN light is off (RUN/STOP switch is not pushed
in).

Push the release button to raise the front cover.
must be on to operate the cover release button.

Figure 5-9

Drive power

Gaining Access to the RA60 Disk Spindle

5-28

Look into the disk well to make sure that the read/write heads
are retracted from the disk shroud area. Failure to do this
could cause damage to the heads or the disk pack or both.

Remove the bottom dust cover from the disk pack canister by
squeezing together the two slide buttons on its underside.
Avoid. placing fingerprints on the exposed disks inside the
canister.

DISK PACK
CANISTER

BOTTOM VIEW

SQUEEZE THESE TWO
SLIDE BUTTONS IN
TO REMOVE BOTTOM
DUST COVER

CZ-OS19

Figure 5-10

RAGO Disk Pack Storage Canister

5-29

Lifting the canister by its handle, set the pack onto the disk
spindle.

Using one hand to turn the handle while holding the disk pack
cover stationary with the other, rotate the pack handle
clockwise until it stops turning. Give one last, firm twist
to the handle and lift the storage canister off the pack.

Close the front cover of the disk drive.

Push in the RUN/STOP switch and wait for the
come on.

5-30

READY

light

Unloading the Disk Pack
1.

Release the RUN/STOP switch and wait for the RUN light
off.

Push in the release button and raise the front cover.

Place the storage canister over the disk pack so that the post
protruding from the center of the disk pack contacts the
canister handle.

Using one hand to turn the handle and the other to hold the
disk
pack
stationary,
rotate
the
canister
handle
counterclockwise until the pack is free of the spindle.

Using the canister handle, lift the pack out of the disk drive
and close the front cover.

Install the bottom dust cover on the base of the storage
canister by pressing it on gently until it.locks into place.

5-31

5.4

RASO DISK DRIVE

The RASO is a rack-mountable disk drive using non-removable media.
It has a data storage capacity of 121 megabytes. Each RASO disk
drive offers dual-port capability. The RASO disk drive operates
on the standard disk interface (SI) bus, which connects the drive
to the controller. As many as four drives can be connected to an
SI controller. The RASO disk drive is shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11

RASO Disk Drive

5-32

5.4.1

RASO Specifications

Table 5-13

RASO Specifications

Qancteristic

Specification

Data Stonge Capacity
(Single drive)
. 16-bit
121 MB
6339
478

HDA word format
Storage capacity
Bits/inch (inner track)
Tracks/inch
Head Disk Assembly (HOA)

Modified frequency
modulation (MFM)

Disk recording method
Number of disks
Disk surfaces
Number of heads
Heads per disk surfa~e
Number of tracks
Logical cylinders
Number of tracks used for
revector and format control
tables
Number of sectors
Number of logical blocks

7 data, I servo
14 data. I servo
2
561 per head
546 per head
14 per head
31 (0 through 30)
236,964 LBNs

Maximum Seek Times
All cylinders
One cylinder
Average seek

SO ms
6ms
2Sms

Latency
3600 r/min + 4.3%- 3.5%
16.6 ms
8.33 ms

Speed
Maximum latency
Average latency
Single Start/Stop Time
Start (maximum)
Start (typical)
Inhibit between stop and restart

5-33

40 seconds
IS seconds
3 minutes

Table 5-13

RASO Specifications (Cont)

Characteristic

Specification

Data Rates
Bit cell time
Bit rate
Word rate (16-bit)

103.3 ns
9.677 MHz
1.65 microseconds

RASO Environmental Limits
Temperature
Operating

10° C to 38° C (50° F to IOI ° F) with
a temperature gradient of 20° C/hour
(36° F /hour)

Non-operating

-40° C to +60° C (-40° F to + 140° F)

Relative humidity
Operating

10% to 90% (non-condensing) with a
maximum wet bulb temperature of 28 ° C
(82° F) and a minimum dew point of
2° C (36° F)

Shipping and storage

10% to 90% with no condensation

Heat dissipation

2460 Btu/hour

Altitude
- Operating

Sea level to 2,400 meters (8,000
feet)
Note: Maximum allowable operating
temperatures are reduced by a
factor of 1.8° C/1000 meters
(I ° F /I 000 feet) for operation
above sea level.
300 meters ( 1000 feet) below sea
level to 3,600 meters (12,000 feet)
above sea level (actual or effective by means of cabin pressurization)

Non-operating and shipping

5-34

Table 5-13

RA80 Specifications (Cont)

Characteristic

Specification

Physical Characteristics
Drive
Height

26 cm (10.38 inches)

Width

44 cm (17.50 inches)
48 cm (18.88 inches)
including bezel

Depth

67 cm (26.50 inches)
71 cm (28.12 inches)
including bezel
66. 7 Kg (14 7 pounds)
approximately

Weight
Electrical

120 Volts ac + 8, -21; 60 Hz
± 1 Hz

Voltages available
(single-phase)

220-240 Volts ac + 16, -36; 50 Hz
± I Hz
Input Power (maximum)
120 Volts ac, 60 Hz
220-240 Volts ac, 50 Hz

720 Watts
720 Watts

Starting current for:
120 Volts ac, 60 Hz
220-240 Volts ac, 50 Hz

31 A (peak surge for five seconds)
17A (peak surge for five seconds)

Running current for:
120 Volts ac, 60 Hz
220-240 Volts ac, 50 Hz
Power factor
Line cord length
(from cabinet)

7.5 A (measured at 117 V)
3.75 A (estimated)
0.8
(8.5 feet)

Plug type
120 Volts ac, 60 Hz
220-240 Volts ac, 50 Hz

NEMA L5-30P
NEMA6-15P

5-35

5.4.2

RA80 Controls And Indicators

5.4.2.1

Operator Control Panel -

The operator control panel is located on the
drive (Figure 5-12).

front

disk

PORTA
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

FAULT INDICATOR AND
RESET SWITCH
(RED)

WRITE-PROTECT
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

RUN/STOP
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

PORT B
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

Figure 5-12

the

RA80 Controls and Indicators

RUN/STOP Switch and Indicator
The RUN/STOP switch is a two-position push button.
In the RUN
(button in) position, a spin-up sequence begins if all power has
been turned on and no faults are detected. A spin-up attempt will
be made following power interruptions as long as the switch
remains in this position.
NOTE
A three-minute delay is recommended between each stop and
restart to prevent opening the thermal circuit breaker
associated with the spindle motor.

In the STOP (button out) position, power to the spindle motor is
turned off.
As soon as spindle rotation stops, the RUN/STOP
indicator goes off.
5-36

FAULT Switch and Indicator
The FAULT light indicates an error condition within the drive, and
the FAULT reset switch is used to correct errors.
The FAULT indicator lights whenever a device-unsafe or error
condition occurs within the disk drive. If a fault occurs during
a spin-up attempt, the spin-up will be aborted.
The FAULT indicator and five other front-panel indicators also
provide a lamp display code that identifies various faults and
errors as they occur.
READY Indicator
The READY indicator lights following a
successful
spin-up
sequence, indicating that the drive is up to speed and ready to
receive commands.
The READY indicator goes off during seek
operations.
The numbered switch cap over the READY indicator lamp also serves
as a unit address plug which distinguishes one drive unit from
another in multi-drive arrangements.
WRITE PROT Switch and Indicator
The WRITE PROT switch is a two-position push button with a
built-in indicator lamp. Pushing this switch in places the disk
drive in the write-protect mode and lights the indicator lamp. In
this mode, the write circuits of the disk drive are disabled and
no data can be written.
Releasing the push button enables the write circuitry and turns
off the WRITE PROT indicator. The WRITE PROT switch is inoperable
when the drive is placed off-line.

5-37

A and B Port Select Switches
The RASO drive is equipped with. two port select push buttons.
These switches (A and B) have built-in lamps, which indicate the
port through which the drive is being accessed. See Table 5-14.
Table 5-14

RASO A and B Port Select Switches

PORT SELECT
SWITCH
A
B

PORT AVAILABILITY

Dual-port programmable

OUT

Neither port available

5.4.2.2

Circuit Breakers -

A circuit breaker is located on the rear panel of each disk unit
(Figure 5-13).
Open the rear door to gain access to the circuit
breaker. This circuit breaker controls the ac power to the de
power supply, the cooling fans, and the spindle motor. The
circuit breaker must be in the ON position before the drive will
operate.
Another circuit breaker is located on the rear of the power
controller (Figure 5-13). This circuit breaker controls power to
all assemblies within the RASO cabinet.
The local/remote switch also controls power to the drive.
should always be turned to the local position (Figure 5-13).

5-38

D
0

DRIVE
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

POWER
CORDS
AC OUTLETS FOR DRIVE
POWER ON FRONT OF
POWER CONTROLLER

POWER
LAMP

Figure 5-13

LOCAL/REMOTE
SWITCH

RASO Circuit Breakers

5-39

CZ-ll5118

5.4.2.3

Front Panel Fault Indicators -

In addition to their usual functions, the six front panel controls
and indicators provide a visual code that identifies generic
faults within the RASO. Figure 5-14 shows the faults that can
occur and the indicator lamp combinations that identify each
particular fault.
When the FAULT indicator light comes on, pressing the FAULT switch
once causes all of the indicator lamps to light momentarily as a
means of verifying that the lamps are functioning.
Pushing the
FAULT switch a second time stores the identity of the fault in the
microprocessor and clears the fault.

5-40

WRITE PROTECT SWITCH
AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

FAULT INDICATOR
AND RESET SWITCH
(RED)
RUN/STOP SWITCH
AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

\EADY INDICATOR
(WHITE)
\

FAULT""~
D ~ ":~:Ii
~ LJ ~

PORT A SWITCH
AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

CONDmON

I
I

SPIN-UP

I
I
ON

R/W DIAGNOSTIC

•

READ/WRITE UNSAFE

•

SPINDLE MOTOR
INTERLOCK

•

SPINDLE MOTOR
SPEED

•

DRIVE DISABLED
BY "DD" BIT

•

HOA OR SERVO BOARD
OVERTEMPERATURE

•

•
•
•

SERVO DIAGl\IOSTIC
INITIAL RECAL

MIC RO PROCESSOR
HARDCORE TEST

MICROCODE

r---8..._...

PORT B SWITCH
AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

ON
ON

*THE INDICATOR STATE WILL BE THE SAME AS IT WAS
BEFORE THE FAULT SWITCH WAS PUSHED
CZ-OC28

Figure 5-14

RASO Operator Control Panel Fault Indicators

5-41

5.4.3
5.4.3.1

RASO Operating Instructions
Spin-Up -

Push in the RUN/STOP button on the drive front panel to begin the
spin-up cycle. The RUN/STOP indicator will immediately light and
the READY indicator will light as soon as the drive has completed
its spin-up cycle.

5.4.3.2

Spin-Down -

Release the RUN/STOP button on the drive front panel to spin-down
the disks. The READY and RUN/STOP indicators will go out. Power
is still applied to the drive until the circuit breaker is
switched off.

5.4.3.3

Removing RASO Power -

To remove power from the RASO, release the RUN/STOP button to spin
down the disks. Wait until the RUN/STOP indicator goes off. Then
switch off the circuit breaker at the rear of the disk drive and
unplug its ac cord from the power controller.

5-42

5.4.4

RASO Customer Care And Maintenance

The air filter in the logic chassis assembly should
and cleaned every six months.

5.4.4.1

inspected

the

Filter Removal -

Pull down the access door on the
(Figure 5-15).

front

bezel

drive

CAUTION
Placing tools on the open access door or leaning on it
can damage the hinge mechanism.

Grasp the filter material and pull it outward until it is free
of the bezel.

5.4.4.2

Filter Cleaning -

Wash the foam air filter in warm water using a mild detergent.

Rinse the filter with clear water, and allow it to dry.

CAUTION
A wet filter can cause damage to the RASO drive.

5-43

5.4.4.3

Filter Replacement -

Slide the filter into place inside the bezel.

Close the access door.
NOTE

If it becomes necessary to replace ·the
order DIGITAL Part No. 7422816-00.

5-44

existing

f i 1 ter,

OPERATOR
CONTROL
PANEL

cz.-

Figure 5-15

RA80 Air Filter Location

5-45

5.5

RA81 DISK DRIVE SUBSYSTEM

The RA81 is a random-access, moving-head disk
drive
with
non-removable media. The RA81 has a data storage capacity of 456
megabytes in 16-bit word format.
The RA81 connects to the
controller via the standard disk interconnect (SI). Additional
disk drives can be connected to a controller to increase the data
storage capacity.
The RA81 can also be connected in a dual-port
arrangement permitting time-shared access by two controllers.

5.5.1

RA81 Specifications
Table 5-15

RA81 Specifications

Characteristic

Specification

Data storage capacity
(Single drive)
16-bit word format

456 MB

Media type

Winchester double density

Head disk assembly(HDA)
Number of disks
Disk surfaces
Number of heads (groups)
Heads per disk surface
Cylinders per head
Sectors per track
16-bit word format
Servo system

7 data, 1 servo
14 data, 1 servo
2
1258 (numbered 0 through 1257)
52
Dedicated and embedded

Performance characteristics
Disk encoding method
Linear bit density

3/2
11,400 bpi, 8550
flux changes per
inch at inner group
36,352
17 .4 megabits per second
57 ns (nominal)

Bytes per track (unformatted)
Transfer rate
Bit cell period
Read initialization time
Write-to-read recovery

10 microseconds (excluding data separator
sync)

5-46

Table 5-15

RA81 Specifications (Cont)

Characteristic

Specification

Read-to write recovery
Data separator
synchronization

1 microsecond
10 microseconds

Rotational latency
Rotational speed
Average rotational latency
Maximum rotational latency
Head switch latency (switch
on a given cylinder)
Average seek
One cylinder
Maximum seek

3600 rpm, + 2.5%, - 3.5%
8.33 ms
16.66 ms
6 ms maximum
28 ms maximum
7 ms maximum
50 ms (1258 cylinders)

Disk rotation start/stop times
Start time
Stop time
Maximum start/stop frequency

Physical characteristics
(Drive only)
Width (nominal)
Depth (nominal)
Height (nominal)
Weight (approx.)

20 seconds maximum
20 seconds maximum
6 (3 minutes between cycles
with drive powered up and
ready during one of the
3-minute cycles)

44.5 centimeters (17 .50 in.)
67.3 centimeters (26.50 in.)
26.4 centimeters (10.38 in.)
67.1 kilograms (148 pounds)

Environmental limits
Temperature
Operating

10 to 40 degrees C (50 to 104
degrees F) with a temperature
gradient of 20 degrees C /hour
(36 degrees F/hour)
-40 to + 60 degrees C
( - 40 to + 140 degrees F)

Non-operating
Relative humidity
Operating

I 0% to 85% (non-condensing)
with a maximum wet bulb
temperature of 28 degrees C
(82 degrees F) and a minimum
dew point of 2 degrees C
(36 degrees F)

5-47

Table 5-15

RAB! Specifications (Cont)

Characteristic

Specification
10% to 85% with no
condensation

Shipping and storage

644 watts (nominal)

Heat dissipation
Altitude
Operating

Sea level to 2400 meters
(8000 feet) above sea level.
Note: Maximum allowable temperatures are reduced by a
factor of 1.8 degrees C/1000
meters (1 degree F / 1000 feet)
for operation at higher
altitude sites
300 meters (1000 feet) below
sea level to 9000 meters
(30000 feet) above sea level
(actual or by means of cabin
pressurization)

Non-operating
and shipping

Power
Voltage requirements
(Single phase)
120 voli, 60 Hz drives

90-128 volts ac, 60 plus
or minus 1 Hz

220-240 volt, 50 drives

184-256 volts ac, 50 plus
or minus 1 Hz

Current requirements
Starting current for
120 volt ac drives

35 ampere peak surge for
4 seconds

Running current for
120 volt ac drives

7.8 amperes rms at
120 volts

Starting current for
220-240 volt ac drives

18 ampere peak surge for
4seconds

Running current for
220-240 volt ac drives

3.5 amperes rms
at 240 volts

Power requirements
Starting power for
120 volt ac drives.

4200 watts at 120 volts

5-48

Table 5-15

RA81 Specifications (Cont)

Characteristic

Specification

Running power for
120 volt ac drives

644 watts at 120 volts

Starting power for
220-240 volt ac drives

4320 watts at 240 volts

Running power for
220-240 volt ac drives

496 watts at 240 v·olts

Power factor

0.9

Line cord length
(from cabinet)

259 cm (8.5 feet)

Plug type
120 volts,60 Hz

Hubbel No.2611
NEMA No.L5-30P
DEC No.12-11193
(See Figure 2-1)

240 volts, 50Hz

Hubbel No.2321
NEMA No.L6-20P
DEC No.12-11192
(See Figure 2-1

5-49

5.5.2

RA81 Controls And Indicators

5.5.2.1

Operator Control Panel -

The RA81 operator control panel is located on
disk drive. See Figure 5-16.

the

front

PORTA
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

FAULT INDICATOR AND
RESET SWITCH
CREDI
RUN/STOP
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

WRITE-PROTECT
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(YELLOW)

PORT B
SWITCH AND INDICATOR
(WHITE)

Figure 5-16

RA81 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

5-50

the

RUN/STOP Switch and Indicator
The RUN/STOP switch is a double-action push button.
In the RUN
(button in) position, the switch requests a drive spin-up and
permits initialization of the drive for operation.
In the STOP
(button out) position, the heads are moved off of the data bands
and the spindle motor is stopped.
If the drive is on-line and operating when the switch is placed in
the STOP position, the drive will complete all outstanding write
operations commanded by the controller before spinning down.
The RUN/STOP indicator light always reflects the state of the
drive spindle.
The indicator is on while the spindle is turning
and off when the spindle has stopped.
If the RUN/STOP switch is in the RUN position on power up, spin-up
will occur by the controller or by manually toggling the RUN/STOP
switch.
NOTE
A m1n1mum three-minute delay is recommended between each
start and restart to prevent opening the thermal circuit
breaker associated with the spindle motor.

5-51

FAULT Switch and Indicator
The FAULT light indicates an error condition within the drive, and
the FAULT reset switch is used to correct errors.
When the disk drive detects an error, the FAULT light is turned
on.
The drive stays in its current operating state until the
condition is corrected. Some faults are corrected automatically
and the light will go off.
If the fault condition is not
corrected, the light will stay on and the FAULT button will have
to be pushed. If a fault occurs during a spin-up try, the spin-up
will be aborted.
The FAULT button is a momentary contact switch. When pushed the
first time, the switch causes the drive to enter an off-line state
(relative to the controller) and to assume control of all
front-panel indicator lights in order to display a blinking error
code. Refer to Table 5-16 for identification of faults and
indicator light combinations. The drive stays off-line as long as
the fault code is being displayed.
When the FAULT switch is
pushed the second time, the drive tries to clear the error
condition, stores the error code, enters the available operating
state, and returns the front-panel indicators to their normal
service. Up to 16 error codes can be stored for later use in
troubleshooting the drive.
Table 5-16

RA81 Front-Panel Fault Identification Codes

FAULT CONDITION

RUN/
STOP

FAULT

RDY

WRITE
PROT

Spin error

Microprocessor
fault

SDI error

Master /slave
error

Servo fine
positioning
error

Servo coarse
positioning
error

Spindle motor
interlock error

Servo or HOA
overtemp error

5-52

Table 5-16

RA81 Front-Panel Fault Identification Codes (Cont)

FAULTCONDmON

FAULT

RDY

R/W unsafe error

R/W command error

Servo/HOA
interlock error

Servo/ microprocessor
interlock error

RUN/
STOP

Read/write
microprocessor
interlock error
Control panel/
microprocessor
interlock error
Personality/
microprocessor
interlock error

WRITE
PROT

B
on

Index error

Write and bad
embedded data

Drive disabled
by DD bit

Servo diagnostic
test error

R/W diagnostic
test error

Diagnostic idle
loop test error

DC low

Microprocessor
hardcore test
error

Write enable
and write protect
asserted error

5-53

UNIT/READY
The READY indicator is preceded by a successful (fault-free)
spin-up sequence and indicates that the drive is in a read/write
ready condition. The READY indicator will only come on when the
RUN/STOP switch is in the RUN position and the RUN light is on.
The READY indicator goes off during seek operations.
The numbered switch cover over the READY indicator light is also a
logic
plug
which distinguishes one drive from ano~her in
multi-drive arrangements. The switch cover has a unique cam-coded
configuration that corresponds to the drive unit number. The
cam-coded switch sets up a unit code corresponding to the drive
number when plugged into the mating cam-encoded switch located
behind the READY indicator light. Refer to Figure 5-17.
Drive
selection is accomplished when the address on the drive select
lines matches the code established by the switch cover.

- ----

------

READY INDICATOR LAMP
AND MICROSWITCH CONTACTS

Figure 5-17

RA81 Cam-Coded Switch Cover

5-54

WRITE PROT
The WRITE PROT switch is a double-action push button with a
built-in indicator light.
Pushing in on this switch places the
drive in the write protect mode and turns on the indicator light.
The write circuits of the drive are disabled in this mode.
Releasing the push button enables the write circuits and turns off
the WRITE PROT indicator light. When the disk is not read/write
ready, it is always write protected.
A and B Port Select Switches
The RA81 disk drive has two port select push button switches.
These double-action switches (A and B) have built-in lights that
indicate the port through which the drive is being accessed.
If
the drive is equipped with dual-port abilities, any one of three
modes can be selected with the A and B switches. See Table 5-17.
Table 5-17
PORT SELECT
SWITCH
B
A

RA81 A and B Port Select Switches

PORT AVAILABILITY

Dual-port programmable

OUT

Neither port available

5-55

5.5.2.2

Circuit Breakers -

Each disk drive has a circuit breaker on the back panel as well as
a breaker on the back of the power controller in the bottom of the
cabinet. Access to these breakers is through the back door of the
cabinet.
The breakers on the drive control the application of ac
power to the drive de power supply, the cooling fans, and the
spindle motor.
This breaker must be on before the drive will
operate.
The power controller breaker regulates the application of ac power
to all assemblies within the RA81 cabinet and must be turned on
before the drive breaker can be effective.

5.5.3

RA81 Operating Instructions

5.5.3.1

Drive Operation -

Spin-Up
Push in the RUN/STOP button on the drive front panel to spin-up
the drive. The RUN indicator will light immediately and the READY
indicator will come on as soon as the drive has completed the
spin-up cycle.
Spin-Down
Release the RUN/STOP button (out position) on the drive front
panel to stop the drive.
The READY indicator will go off
immediately and the RUN indicator will go off as soon as disk
rotation stops.
Removing RA81 Power
Do a spin-down as described above. After the RUN indicator has
gone off, turn the drive breaker on the back panel off and
disconnect the cord going to the power controller.
This will
remove all power to the drive.

5-56

5.5.4

RA81 Customer Care And Maintenance

The air filter in the logic chassis assembly should
and cleaned every six months.

5.5.4.1

inspected

Air Filter Removal -

To remove the air filter, proceed as follows:
1.

Pull down the access door on the front
Refer to Figure 5-18.

bezel

the

drive.

NOTE

The hinge mechanism can be damaged by placing tools on
the open access door or by leaning on it.

Grasp the filter material and pull it outward until it is free
of the bezel.

5.5.4.2

Filter Cleaning -

Wash the foam air filter in warm water using a mild detergent.

Rinse the filter material with clear water and then
to dry.

CAUTION

A wet filter can cause damage to the RA81 drive.

5-57

allow

5.5.4.3

Filter Replacement -

Slide the filter into place inside the bezel.

Close the access door.

NOTE
Replace the
7422816-00.

filter

ordering

DIGITAL

part

number

OPERATOR
CONTROL
PANEL

Figure 5-18

RA81 Air Filter Removal

5-58

5.6

RM05 DISK SUBSYSTEM

The RM05 is a removable media disk subsystem that has a formatted
data storage capacity of 256 megabytes. The RM05 uses a 14-inch
disk pack with 12 platters. Data is recorded in 16-bit words.

5.6.1

RM05 Specifications
Table 5-18

RM05 Specifications

Seek time
Maximum seek (822 cylinder)
One cylinder seek (maximum)
Average seek
Seek to the same cylinder

SS ms
6ms
30ms
4µs

Latency

Speed
Maximum latency
Average latency

3600 r/min
17.3 ms
8.33 ms

Start/stop time
Start (maximum)
Start (typical)
Stop (with power) (maximum)
Stop (with power) (typical)
Stop (without power)

35 s
25 s
35 I
25 I
120s

Heads
1
19

Servo head
Read/write heads
Data rates

103.3 ns
1.65 µs

Bit cell time

Word rate
Number of addressable
registers in RMOS adapter

Error detection/correction

32-bit ECC/sector

Time for error correction

4.47 ms, maximum

5-59

Table 5-18

RM05 Specifications (Cont)

Olaracterisdc

Specification

Environmental limits
·Temperature
Operating:

IS.0° to 32.2° C (S9° to 90° F)
with a maximum gradient of 6.7°
C (12° F) per hour.

Non-operating:

-40° to 70.0° C (-40° to 158°
F) with a maximum gradient of
20° C (36° F) per hour.

Relative humidity
Operating:

20 to 80 percent (providing
there is no condensation)

Non-operating:

S to 9S percent (providing
there is no condensation)

Operating:

30S m (1000 ft) below sea level
to 2000 m (6SOO ft) above sea
level

Non-operating:

30S m (1000 ft) below sea level
to 4S72 m (IS,000 ft) above sea
level

Altitude

Electrical
. Voltages available
(Drive)·

208 V ( + 14.6, -29.0), 60 Hz
230 V ( + 14.S, -32.0), 60 Hz
220 V ( + 15.0, -25.0), SO Hz
240 V ( + 17.0, -27 .0), SO Hz

Voltages available
(Adapter)

120 V ( +8.0, -8.0), 60 Hz
220 V ( + 15.0, -25.0), SO Hz
240 V ( + 17.0, -27 .0), SO Hz

Start current

208 Vac, 60 Hz@ 39.0.A rms max
230 Vac, 60 Hz@ 40.0 Arms max
220 Vac, SO Hz@ 40.0 Arms max
240 Vac, SO Hz@ 41.0 Arms max

5-60

Table 5-18

RM05 Specifications (Cont)

Line current

Disk and carria1e in
motion

208 Vac, 60 Hz@ 8.0 Arms max
230 Vac, 60 Hz@ 7.2 Arms max
220 Vac, SO Hz@ 9.S Arms max
240 Vac, SO Hz@ 8. 7 Arms max

Disk not in motion

208 Vac, 60 Hz@ 2.0 Arms max
230 Vac, 60 Hz@ 1.8 Arms max
220 Vac, SO Hz@ 2.S A rms max
240 Vac, SO Hz@ 2.3 Arms max

Adapter

120 Vac, 60 Hz@ 2.1 Arms max
220 Vac, SO Hz@ 1.3 Arms max
240 Vac, SO Hz@ 1.4 Arms max

Line cord length

366 cm (12 ft)

Disk cartridge type

RMOSP

Weight

RMOS drive and cabinet

249 q (SSO lbs)

Adapter cabinet
With one adapter
With two adapten

S4 kg (120 lbs)
91 kg (200 lbs)
127 kg (280 lbs)

AC plug types
RMOS drive
120 volt 60 Hz
208 volt SO Hz

NEMAL6-20P
Not shipped

Adapter
120 volt 60 Hz
240 volt SO Hz

NEMA S-lSP
NEMA6-ISP

5-61

Table 5-19

RM05P Disk Pack Specifications

Disk diameter

35.56 cm (14 in)

Number of diab

12 (the upper and lower di1b
arc not used for recordina)
19 read/write and one read-only
servo 1urface

Number of recording 1urfaces
Cylinders per disk pack

823

Total number of tracks

15,637 per disk pack

Tracks per cylinder

Tracks per inch

384

Bad sector file

Cylinder 822, track 18

Environmental requirements
Temperature ranse
Operatins:

10° to 57° C (50° to 135° F);
temperature change rate not to
exceed 0.1° C (0.2° F) per
minute

No~perating:

-40° to 65° C (-40° to 150° F);
temperature change rate not to
exceed 14° C (2S° F) per hour

Relative humidity
Operating and non-operating:

8 to 80 percent

Wet bulb reading
Operating:

2S° C (78° F), maximum

Non-operating:

30° C (85° F), maximum

Altitude
Operating:

Sea level to 3,050 m (10,000
ft)

Non-operating:

Sea level to 12, 190 m (40,000
ft)

Stray magnetic fields
Not to exceed SO oenteds

Operating and non-operating:
5-62

5.6.2

RM05 Controls And Indicators

The operator controls and indicators for the RM05 disk subsystem
are on the front panel and inside the rear door on the power
supply control panel. The controls and indicators for the RM
adapter are on the front panel and inside the rear door on the
adapter power supply.

5.6.2.1

Operator Control Panel -

The operator control panel is on the front of the disk drive
cabinet and contains four controls and four indicators (Figure
5-19).

NOTE
LOGICAL ADDRESS MAY IE
ANY NUMBER FROM 0 TO 7

Figure 5-19

RM05 Controls and Indicators

5-63

START Switch
The START switch is a two-position push button.
Pressing the
START switch when the drive is in the power-off condition (disk
pack not spinning) lights the START indicator and initiates the
power-up sequence provided the conditions listed below are met.
Disk pack is installed.
Pack access cover is closed.
All power supply circuit breakers are on.

START Indicator
This indicator lights when the START switch is depressed from the
OFF position provided the three conditions mentioned above are
met. The light indicates that power is on.
READY Indicator
This indicator lights when the disk is up to speed, the heads
loaded, and no fault condition exists.

are

Logical Address Plug
This plug determines the logical address of the
address can be changed to any number from 0 to 7.

5-64

drive.

The

FAULT Indicator
This indicator lights when any of the faults listed below exist in
the drive.
Write fault
More than one head selected
Read and write gates selected simultaneously
Read or write and off cylinder
Voltage fault
Once the fault no longer exists, the FAULT indicator can be turned
off by any of the following methods.
Pushing the FAULT button on the operator panel
Issuing a fault clear signal from the controller
Issuing an initialize signal from the controller

FAULT Clear Switch
This switch is a momentary-contact push button used to clear the
FAULT indicator. Depressing the FAULT clear switch turns off the
FAULT indicator only if the fault condition no longer exists.
Write PROTECT Indicator
This indicator lights when the drive is in the write protect mode.
Data cannot be written on the pack when the drive is in this mode.
Write PROTECT Switch
This switch is a two position push button. Pressing the switch to
light the write PROTECT indicator disables the drive write
circuits and prevents them from writing data on the pack.
Pressing the switch again enables the write circuits and turns off
the light.

5-65

5.6.2.2

Power Supply Control Panel -

The power supply control panel is located inside the rear door of
the drive cabinet, at the bottom of the cabinet. The panel
contains the MAIN AC circuit breaker, the LOCAL/REMOTE switch, an
HOURS elapsed time meter, and several test points and circuit
breakers. The panel ia shown in Figure 5-19.
MAIN AC Circuit Breaker
This circuit breaker controls application of site ac power to the
drive.
Closing this breaker immediately applies power to the
blower and elapsed time meter.
HOURS Elapsed Time Meter
This meter records the accumulated ac power-on time.
starts when the MAIN AC circuit breaker is closed.

The

meter

LOCAL/REMOTE Switch
This switch determines whether the drive can be powered up from
the drive controls (LOCAL) or from the controller (REMOTE).
In
the LOCAL position, drive power-up sequence starts when the START
switch is pressed.
In the REMOTE position, the drive power-up
sequence starts when the START switch is pressed and sequence
power ground is received from the controller.
Other Circuit Breakers
The other circuit breakers on the power supply
control application of associated voltages to
provide circuit overload protection.

5-66

control panel
the drive and

5.6.2.3

Port-Select Switches (Dual-Port Option) -

The port-select switches are located on the upper left corner of
the front panel of the RM adapter cabinet. Figure 5-20 shows the
RM adapter cabinet. Depressing the port A switch allows only the
controller connected to part A to access the drive. Depressing
the port B switch allows only the controller connected to port B
to
access the drive.
With neither or both port switches
depressed, either controller can access the drive depending upon
the logic of the RM adapter.
•ADAPTER

,POWER SUPPLY PANEL

•111111111111111•111
•1111mar
•

·····-·

Figure 5-20

RM05 Adapter Cabinet

5-67

5.6.2.4

Adapter Power Supply Controls -

The adapter power supply controls are inside the adapter cabinet
and can be reached through the rear door of the cabinet. Figure
5-20 shows the location of the adapter power supply, and Figure
5-21 shows the controls.

DC POWER
CIRCUIT llEAKER

IC POWER .
CIRCUIT IREAICll

DC POWEil
JACK(Jtt

FUSE (F1t

RECEPTACLE

TOP VIEW

POWER CORD

Figure 5-21

cz.RM05 Adapter Power Supply Controls

5-68

AC Power Circuit Breaker
This circuit breaker controls ac power to the adapter.
When in
the ON position, it routes ac power to the adapter. When a second
adapter is installed in the upper part of the cabinet, the circuit
breaker on the lower adapter also controls power to the upper
adapter. The upper adapter is plugged into the lower adapter.
DC Power Circuit Breaker
This circuit breaker applies ac power to the adapter de power
supply if the ac circuit breaker is on. The de power supply
provides the de voltages needed by the adapter circuits.
-15 V Supply Fuse (Fl)
This fuse protects the transformer from circuit overloads
-15 V supply.

the

AC Indicator
This light, located next to the ac power cord, is lit whenever the
ac power cord is plugged into a source of ac power. It is a
warning indicator which shows that even though the drive is not
energized, there is ac voltage present up to the ac circuit
breaker terminal.

5-69

5.6.3
5.6.3.1

RM05 Operating Instructions
Disk Pack Loading And Drive Start-Up -

Power-On Procedure
1.

Turn on the ac and de power circuit breakers on the RM adapter
power supply.

Turn on all circuit breakers on the drive power supply control
panel.

Ensure that the drive blower starts
minutes before loading a disk pack.

operate.

Wait

CAUTION
Failure to allow the blower to operate for two minutes
before installing the disk pack may cause damage to
the disk pack or heads.

Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to the desired position.

5-70

two

Disk Pack Loading Procedure
CAUTION
Ensure that no dust or other foreign particles are in
the shroud area.
Also, ensure that the blowers
operate for at least two minutes before installing a
disk pack. This will allow the purging of the blower
system.

Check that the drive is powered on.

Raise the pack access cover and
fully retracted (Figure 5-22).

ensure

that

the

heads

CAUTION
Heads that are not fully retracted may be damaged by
or may damage the disk pack.
The condition may
indicate a servo problem.
If the heads are not fully
retracted, DO NOT push on them.
Contact service
personnel.

5-71

are

LATCH
RELEASE

PACK ACCESS
COVER

GAS
SPRING

GROUND
STRAP
PACK ACCESS
COVER INTERLOCK
SWITCH

TOP
COVER

Figure 5-22

RM05 Pack Access

5-72

Diseng?ge the bottom dust cover from th~ disk pack by
squeezing the levers of the release mechanism in the center of
the bottom dust cover (Figure 5-23). Set the cover aside in
an uncontaminated storage area.

Figure 5-23

RM05P Disk Pack

5-73

Set the disk pack on the spindle. Avoid using force to place
the disk pack on the spindle. Twist the pack handle clockwise
until it is secured to the spindle lock-shaft.

Lift the top dust cover clear of the drive and store
the bottom dust cover.

Close the pack access cover immediately to prevent dust and
other foreign matter from contaminating the disk surfaces.

Press the START switch on the operator control
START indicator should come on immediately.

panel.

with

The

Disk Pack Removal Procedure
1.

Spin down the disk by pressing the START switch to unload the
heads and stop the drive motor. The READY light will go out
immediately and the START light will go out when the disk pack
has stopped rotating.

Open the pack access cover when disk pack rotation has stopped
and the cover has unlocked.

Check that the heads have fully retracted.

Place the top dust cover over the disk pack so the post
protruding from the center of the disk pack fits into the dust
cover handle.

Turn the dust cover handle counterclockwise until the disk
pack is free of the spindle. Avoid using force when removing
the disk pack from the spindle.

Lift the top cover and disk pack clear of the drive and
the pack access cover.

Place the bottom dust cover on the disk
pack in a proper storage area.

5-74

pack

and

store

close
the

5.6.4
5.6.4.1

RM05 Customer Care And Maintenance
Disk Pack Storage -

To ensure maximum disk pack
following precautions.

life

and

reliability,

observe

the

Store disk packs in a computer room environment.
Allow two hours before use for adjustment to the computer room
conditions if the disk pack has been stored in a different
environment.
Do not store disk packs in
environment.

direct

sunlight

Store disk packs flat, not on edge.
high. A pack tree is recommended.

5.6.4.2

They may be

dirty

stacked

two

Disk Pack Precautions -

Ensure that both top and bottom plastic covers are on and
locked together whenever a disk pack is not installed on a
drive.
Mark packs with a pen or
produce a loose residue.

a felt-tip marker that
Never use a lead pencil.

will

not

Do not attach labels to the disk pack.
Attach them to the
plastic covers.
Labels will not remain attached to the pack
when it is spinning and catastrophic head crashes may result.
Do not clean disk surfaces.
Cleaning
trained service personnel only.
Do not touch disk recording surfaces.

5-75

should

done

5.6.4.3

Disk Pack Handling -

The positive pressure filtration system of the drive eliminates
the need for periodic inspection and cleaning of the disk pack.
However, certain symptoms may
indicate
improper
operating
conditions for the pack. Immediately stop the drive and remove
the disk pack if any of the conditions listed below occur.
A sudden increase in error rates related to one or more heads
An unusual noise such as pinging or scratching
A burning odor
Known or suspected contamination of the pack from dust, smoke,
oil, or the like

CAUTION
Do not operate the pack on another drive until determining
that the media is not damaged or contaminated.
Do not operate the drive with another pack
before
determining that the heads and shroud area are not damaged
or contaminated.

Do not attempt to inspect or clean a disk pack. Call
service personnel for inspection of the disk pack.

5-76

trained

5.7

RP07 DISK DRIVE

The RP07 disk drive is a fixed media, random access, mass storage
device.
It provides for storage and retrieval of data from any
location on the rotating disks. The drive has a moving carriage
which positions 32 read/write and one servo head over 17 disk
surfaces.
It has 630 cylinders available for customer use.

5.7.1

RP07 Specifications
Table 5-20

RP07 Specifications

OPERATION:
Start-up time, (CBl ON to
heads on cylinder 900)

82 seconds + 3 seconds

Disk rotation

3633 RPM +3%

Spindle stop time

20 sec

DISK STACK:

Disk diameter

3.5•.56 cm (14")

Number of disks

Data recording surfaces

Servo recording surf ace

READ/WRITE:
Number of Read/Write heads

Cylinders per disk stack

2X(630 + 2 FE cylinders)
= 1260 + 4 FE cylinders total

Tracks per cylinder

Tracks per inch

.537 (nominal)

Total tracks per disk stack

20,160 + 64 FE Tracks

Data bytes per track max
16 bit mode (.50 sectors/TK)
Sector capacity
Track capacity
18 bit mode (43 sectors/TK)
Sector capacity
Track capacity

2.56 words; .512 bytes
12 ,800 words; 2.5 ,600 bytes
2.56 words; .576 bytes
11,008 words; 24 ,768 bytes

Stack capacity
16 bit mode (.50 sectors/TK)
18 bit mode (43 sectors/TK)

2.58 megawords; .516 megabytes
221 megawords; 499.3 megabytes

5-77

Table 5-20

RP07 Specifications (Cont)

Data transfer rate
Interleaved sectors

1.3 megabytes/second max (128
word max buffer - 16 or 18 bit mode)
2.16 megabytes/second max (16 bit
mode)
1.92 megabytes/second max (18 bit
mode)

Non-interleaved sectors

Recording density--in bits per
inch (linear)

11,139 BPI on inner track (nominal)

~VIRONMENT:

Operating temperature range

15°c (59°F) to 32°c (90°F)
with max change of 6.6°C (12°F)
per hour

Operating humidity range

2096-80% with max wet bulb of
25°C (77°F)

Shipping temperature range

-40°C (-40°F) to +66°C (+151°F)
with max change of 14°F/hour

Shipping humidity range

596 to 90%

Drive cooling (internal)

No external forced air is necessary

Heat Dissipation

7000 BTU/Hour (2.051 KW)

Altitude Range - Operating
(Normal)

Sea level to 2400 M (sea level to
8000 feet)

POWER REQUIREMENT:

TYPE

NOMINAL
OR TAP
VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE

Taps

FREQUENCY
.TOLERANCE

60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz

+2'16
+2'16
+296

200/208
220
240

170-220
184-236
201-256

50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz

+2'16
+2'16
+2'16

200/208
220.
240

170-220
184-236
201-256

3Voltage

55 amps (max)
8 amps (max)

Starting current surge
Running current

5-78

RANGE

Table 5-20

RP07 Specifications (Cont)

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF CABINET:

Height

118.l cm (46 •.5")

Width

.57 .1.5 cm (22 •.5")without side covers
62.23 cm (24 •.5") with one side cover
67 .31 cm (26 •.5") with two side covers

Depth

83.82 cm (33.0")

Mounting

Adjustable levelers (casters also
provided)

Weight

Approximately 181.44 kg (400 lbs) total

Floor loading

382 kg/m 2 (78 lbs per square foot)

RECOMMENDED CLEARANCES:

71 cm (28") minimum
71 cm (28") minimum
0" without side covers
31 cm (12") with side covers

Front
Rear
Side
Side

Characteristics
ACCESSING:

Electromagnetic actuator
Microprocessor controJJed. Closed-loop
track foJJowing and positioning

Access drive motor
Access control
Direct access motion:
Coarse positioning mode

Initially moves heads to desired
cylinder
Maintains heads on desired cylinder

Fine positioning mode
Access times:
One cylinder seek
Average seek
Maximum seek
Average rotational latency time
Maximum rotational latency time

5-79

.5 miJliseconds (maximum)
23 milJiseconds
46 miJJiseconds
8.26 milliseconds
16 •.52 miJJiseconds

5.7.2

RP07 Controls And Indicators

The RP07 operator panel (Figure 5-24), located at the front of the
drive, enables communication between the operator and the drive.

r;;-i

L.:!!!Ll

WRITE]
[ PROTECT

START

ACCESS A

~ ~ ~ ~Affl D
STOP

ACCESS B

MKV84-1027

Figure 5-24

RP07 Operator Controls and Indicators

5-80

5.7.2.1

Controls -

START/STOP Switch
This is a two-position toggle switch.
When placed in START
position
(up),
it initiates the drive spindle motor start
sequence.
In the STOP position (down), it causes the heads to
position correctly and removes power from the spindle motor.
Should a main power interruption occur and power be subsequently
restored, the drive will cycle up if the START/STOP switch is
still in the START position.
ONLINE Switch
The ONLINE switch is a two-position toggle switch.
When this
switch is in the ONLINE position (up), the RP07 drive is available
to the VAX-11/785. Placing the switch in the down position causes
the drive to be OFFLINE.
WRITE PROTECT Switch
This switch is a two-position toggle switch. When placed in the
ON position (up), it sets the drive in a write protect mode only
when a write command is not already in progress.
If a write
operation is in progress when the switch is moved to ON, write
protection is inhibited until termination of the write command.
When the WRITE PROTECT switch is placed in the OFF (down)
position, the write protect condition is immediately released.

5-81

ACCESS A, A/B, B Switch
This is a three-position toggle switch. The A {up)
(down) positions override the A/B {mid) position.

and

the

Two independent MASSBUS controllers may share a single RP07 drive.
This dual controller option provides three states in which the
drive can interface with the two controllers.
1.

Connected to Controller A (up position)
Only controller a can operate on the drive registers (except
for the Attention Summary Pseudo Register and the Drive Type
Register). On single access drives, "A" is forced true
regardless of switch position.

Connected to Controller B {down position)
Only controller B can operate on the drive registers {except
for the Attention Summary Pseudo Register and the Drive Type
Register).

Neutral (Programmable A/B - mid position)
The drive can be accessed by either controller. Changing the
position of the access switch after initialization produces no
effect on the drive.

To change ports by using the ACCESS switch, do the following.
1.

Place the ONLINE switch down.

Place the ACCESS switch in the desired position.

Place the ONLINE switch up.

5-82

5.7.2.2

Indicators -

Initiation of a start-spindle sequence illuminates all indicators
on the operator control panel for one second as a lamp test.
UNSAFE Indicator
The UNSAFE indicator lights only when an unsafe error condition
develops in the drive.
The indicator goes out when the unsafe
condition is reset.
An early temperature warning or an inadequate air flow will cause
the UNSAFE indicator to blink until the condition is corrected or
the drive shuts itself down.
ONLINE Indicator
The ONLINE indicator lights when the spindle-start sequence
completed and the drive is available to the VAX-11/785.
The ONLINE
conditions.

indicator

goes

out

under

any

The ONLINE switch is placed to OFFLINE.

The START/STOP switch is in the STOP position.

The UNSAFE indicator is lighted.

The UNSAFE indicator is blinking.

the

following

WRITE PROTECT Indicator
The WRITE PROTECT indicator reflects the status of the switch.
ACCESS A, A/B, B Indicator
When the A indicator is lighted, it indicates that port A is being
accessed by the controller. When the B indicator is on, port B is
being accessed by the controller. Both indicators appearing to be
lighted indicates that the drive is in the A/B state.

5-83

5.7.3
5.7.3.1

RP07 Operating Instructions
Start Up -

Determine if the disk is to be write protected, and place
WRITE PROTECT switch to the appropriate position.

Place the ACCESS A, A/B, B switch in the appropriate state.

Place the ONLINE switch to ONLINE.

Place the START/STOP switch in the up position to start.

the

NOTE
The spindle-start sequence completes in 30 seconds.

5.7.3.2

Shut Down -

Place the ONLINE switch to OFFLINE.

Place the START/STOP switch in the down position to stop.
spindle-stop sequence completes in 20 seconds.

5.7.4

RP07 Customer Care And Maintenance

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are ~resent inside this equipment.
Installation and servicing should be performed by a
qualified and trained service representative.
Bodily
injury or equipment damage may result from improper
servicing.

5-84

The

5.7.4.1

Precautions -

Keep pens, pencils, and all
drive.

other

Do NOT place beverages on the drive.

foreign

objects

OFF

the

CAUTION
Beverages spilled on drive covers could filter down
between covers and cause damage to drive circuitry.

If the drive is to be moved a long distance, or a short
distance over a rough surface, it should be done only by an
RP07 qualified service representative.

If, during drive operation, an unusual sound occurs, such
metal to metal scraping, tinging, or popping, IMMEDIATELY:
Place the drive OFFLINE.
Place the START/STOP switch in the STOP position.
Disconnect the main source of AC power.
Contact the service representative.

CAUTION
Continued use of the drive under the circumstances
listed above may result in additional damage to the
drive components or assemblies or both.

5-85

5.7.4.2

Customer Preventive Maintenance Procedures -

Customer maintenance procedures for the RP07 drive consist of:
Replacing the drive pref ilter semiannually.
External care and cleaning of drive service covers.

Pref ilter Replacement
The prefilter (Figure 5-25) is a fiber type filter inserted in its
housing in the blower assembly.
It traps the larger airborne
particles of contaminants, thus preventing them from circulating
through
the
electronics library and absolute filter.
The
frequency with which the prefilter should be replaced depends upon
the site environment.
It is recommended that the prefilter be
replaced every six months except when the site environment is less
than computer room standard.
The pref ilter should then be
replaced more often.
CAUTION
1.

Do NOT use a replacement prefilter
broken, or obviously damaged.

bent,

Do NOT attempt to clean or reuse the prefilter.
a throw-away item. Discard it after use.

It is

5-86

that

MKV84-0942

Figure 5-25

RP07 Drive Prefilter

5-87

To remove the prefilter from the RP07:
1.

Open the drive front cover.

Slide the existing prefilter out of its housing in the blower
assembly.
Note the air flow arrow direction. Discard the
used filter.

Slide the replacement prefilter into its housing in the blower
assembly.
Note the air flow arrow direction (arrow pointing
up).
NOTE
Insure that the replacement prefilter is installed
correctly. The arrow should be pointing up toward the
top of the drive, and the prefilter should be slid all
the way into its housing.

Close the drive front cover.

5-88

Drive Covers
The RP07 drive has five service covers: front, top, rear, and two
side covers.
All drive service covers must be in place during
drive operation, with the exception of the side covers.
NOTE
Side covers may not always be used between drives when two
or more drives are together in a string configuration.

The following procedures are recommended to
quality and appearance of the RP07:
1.

insure

and

maintain

Remove fingerprints, dirt, film, or oily residue from the
drive service covers with a soft lint-free cloth dampened with
a cleaning solvent such as isopropyl alcohol.
WARNING
Avoid excessive use of
cleaning
solvents
near
electrical wiring and components. Injury to personnel
or damage to the equipment or both may result.

A damaged service cover should be replaced if it is damaged to
such a degree that it will affect the operation of the drive.

5-89

5.8

TU77 MAGNETIC TAPE TRANSPORT

The TU77 magnetic tape transport records and reads data in 9-track
nonreturn to zero (NRZI) or phase encoded (PE) format. Bit
density is 800 bits per inch for the NRZI format and 1600 BPI for
the PE format.
The transport can read data in the forward or
reverse direction. The read/write tape speed for both the forward
and reverse directions is 125 inches per second. the nominal
rewind time for a 731.5 m (2400 ft) reel is 65 seconds.

5.8.1

TU77 Specifications
Table 5-21

TU77 Specifications

T1pe ( camput1r lflde)
W"ldtb
Tbiclmea

12.6492 ± 0.0508 mm(0.498 ± 0.002 in)
0.0381 mm(l.5 mil)

T1pe teulm

2.224 ± 0.139 Newtom (8.0 m lllllllinal)

a.i dilmeter(lllfOlollO

266.7 m(I0.5 in) m11nmm(Note I) aad cay kNld
c:artridll #I aad #2•

1600 BPIPE
IOO BPINRZI

Dul a:t (wlda erue bu4

3.2 ai1(125 ipl)
±3 perCllllt

Lana term apeed Yudliaa

±I perGIDl

a-ind time (731.5 m) (2'400 ft)

65 lecoadl DDllliul (80 lec:onds muim~

TIPI cleaner

Dual-bllde type CCllllleeted to YIClllllll supply

lnterchanael diapi--at
Rad
Write NRZI

3.8111m(l5011ia) muimum (Note 2)
5.72 11m(225 11ia) maximum (Note 3)
11.4311m(45011ia) !Dl•hntun

Write PE

Stan time
Stop time

3.0±0.3 ma
3.0±0.3 ma

Stan distlnce
Stop distac:e

4.216 ± 0.508 mm(0.166 ± 0.02 in)
4.953 ± 0.508 mm(0.195 ± 0.02 in)

lesiJminl ol llPI (BOT) aad ead al tape (EO'I)
cletec:ton (Note 4) .

PbotoeleClric

T1pec:...,...

Noae

Pneumatic interlock

T1pe motion diubled when YllCUUlll is loat in YICUUlll
c:ohmm.

No puter dwl 10 lec:onds without a retry, aad 20
secoadl with a retry t'or 10.1/2 inch reell.
Unload time

Leu dwl 7 ucoada for 10.1/2 inch nela

Write pp to rud pp distlnce

0.381 ·cm ± 0.013 cm (0.150 in ± 0.005 in)

Weisbt

288 q(640 Iba) (maater unit)

5-90

Table 5-21

TU77 Specifications (Cont)

Item

Specification

Cabinet dimensions
Height
Width
Depth (from face of front door to rear of cabinet)

152.4 cm (60.0 in)
67.3 cm(26.5 in)
81.9 cm(32.3 in)

Operating temperature
(Electronics)

4.44° to44.0°C(40°to112°F)
(Note5)

Nonoperating temperature

-45.55° to 71.11°c (-50° to 160°F)

Operating altitude

0 to 2439 m (0 to 8000 ft) (Note 6)

Nonoperating altitude

15,240 m(S0,000 ft) maximum

Power
Volts ac
Frequency

200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250 (Note 7)
SO± 1 or60± I Hz

Kilovolt Amp (KVA)
Standby (loaded)
Start/stop

1.3 KVA maximum(Note 8)
2.1 KVA maximum (Note 8)

Electronics

All silicon

177.8 mm (7 in) and 216.0 mm(8.5 in) reels may be used but cannot be autoloaded

This is the maximum displacement between any two bits of a character when reading a master tape using the read
section of the read-after-write head.

This is the maximum displacement between any two bits of a character on a tape written with all ones using the write
section of the read-after-write bead.

The approximate distance from the detection area to the write head gap is 35.6 mm ( 1.40 in).

For data transfer, the operating temperature depends on the nature of the tape material

Operation above610 m(2000 ft), in 610 m(2000 ft) increments requires installation of high altitude pulleys and beltl
in the Ttn7 power pack.

Line variations must be within +10 percent

Slave unit only. Add 625 W for master units.

5-91

5.8.2

TU77 Controls And Indicators

The TU77 controls and indicators are on the transport control
panel.
The controls and indicators are shown in Figure 5-26 and
listed in Tables 5-22 and 5-23.

SEE NOTE

,...1..

power

on line

LOAD/REW

ON LINE

bot

file protect
UNLOAD

load fault

RESET

DODD

eooo

TU 77

111000

J
Note:
Slave select switch not lahPled on
fllnl!I.

.. ., . .,

Figure 5-26

TU77 Control Panel

5-92

Table 5-22

TU77 Controls

Control

Function

Slave Select switch
(unlabeled)

Selects the address (slave number 0 to 3) of the tape transport

LOAD/REW

Pressing and releasing the LOAD/REW button will initiate one of three
sequences.
1.

With no tape in path, a load sequence is initiated.

With tape in path but not tensioned, a mi~ reel load sequence is initiated
In a mi~ reel load sequence the tape will load and nm in the revene
direction to BOT.

With tape in path and tensioned, and the transport oft: line, the tape
rewinds to BOT. If the tape is already at BOT or if the transport is o~ line.,
no action occurs.

ON LINE

Pressing and releasing the ON- LINE button will change the transport from offline to o~ line. Pressing and releasing the button again will change the transport
from o~ line to oft'.. line.

UNLOAD

If the TU77 is off- line, pressing and releasing the UNLOAD button causes the
tape to rewind and unload If the tape is already at BOT, it will unload If the
TU77 is o~ line, the UNLOAD button has no effect

RESET

Pressing and releasing the RESET button terminates all functions and clears a
load fault

5-93

Table 5-23

TU77 Indicators

Indicator

Function

power

Indicates presence of de and secondary ac power.

bot

Indicates tape is at BOT.

on line

Indicates the Ttn7 is on-line. The transport will return to oft'.. line if any of the
following occur.
1.

ON LINE button is· pressed

An external rewind unload command is received

Vacuum column interlock is broken

AC power is lost

RESET button is pressed

file protect

Indicates that a reel of tape without a writ&- enable ring has been loaded onto the
transport

load fault

Lamp flashes when a load fault has occurred; there are two causes.
1.

The autoload sequence has failed to load a tape from a26 7 mm( 10-1/2
in) reel after two trys.

A load sequence has failed to load tape froma216 orl78 mm(S-1/2 or7
in) reels.

800

Indicates the tape transport is set to read or write at 800 BPI ( NRZI mode).

1600

Indicates the tape transport is set to read or write at 1600 BPI (PE mode).

5-94

5.8.3
5.8.3.1

TU77 Operating Instructions
Power -

Power is applied to the TU77 when the VAX-11/785 is turned on.
The 861 power control is remotely enabled from the VAX-11/785 and
applies ac power from the power source to the TU77 cabinet.

5.8.3.2

Auto-load/Manual Load Selection -

Figure 5-27 shows various conditions and interlock settings that
affect the selection of an auto-load or manual load procedure.
Loading of a 216 or 178 mm (8-1/2 or 7 in) reel requires the
manual procedure.
If a 267 mm (10-1/2 in) reel in a cartridge is
loaded, the cartridge will be engaged. The interlock bypasses the
auto-load interlock and causes the auto-load procedure to be used.
A full reel of tape is needed for an auto-load sequence. The last
turn of tape must be between 1.59 and 0.64 cm (5/8 and 1/4 in)
from the outer edge of the reel (Figure 5-28).
Large 276 mm
(10-1/2
in)
reels not containing sufficient tape to load
automatically must be loaded manually.
If the tape is not in a cartridge, the autoload procedure is
followed if the transport front door is closed. When the front
door is open, the auto-load procedure will be used only if the
Otherwise, the manual
auto-load
interlock
is pulled out.
procedure must be followed.

5-95

NO
NO

MANUAL LOAD
PROCEDURE
CPARAGRAPH 3.2.4)

Figure 5-27

AUTO LOAD
PROCEDURE
(PARAGRAPH 3.2.3)

TU77 Auto-load/Manual Load Selection

Figure 5-28

TU77 Tape Content Limit

5-96

5.8.3.3

Auto-load -

Check that the tape path is clean.

Check that the tape reel is 267 mm (10-1/2 in) and that it has
a full reel of tape.

Check that the end of tape has a clean edge and is not bent,
torn, or frayed.
If necessary, trim the end with the tape
crimper (P/N 47-00038).
NOTE
Do not crimp the tape unnecessarily.
Each crimping
shortens the tape leader and could eventually lead to
failures in the auto-load sequence.

Check that a static charge is not causing the end of tape to
stick to the reel. The end of tape must be free of the reel
to accomplish an auto-load.

If a write operation will be performed, install a write enable
ring onto the rear flange of the tape reel.

Place the supply reel in position on the upper hub,
rotate
until it slips easily into place, and press the reel-retaining
actuator.' The reel should be positioned so that the tape will
unwind if the reel is turned clockwise.

Carefully close the buffer
closed securely.

Close the transport front door.

door,

making

sure

the

door

NOTE
The transport front door must be shut to close the
auto-load interlock and enable the auto-load sequence.
If you want to leave the door open, override the
interlock by pulling the switch out.

5-97

applied

the

tape

transport

(power

Check that power is
indicator on).

10.

Follow the instructions and check for the events specified in
Figure 5-28.
If the tape fails to load properly, the figure
contains some operator troubleshooting hints you can try
before calling maintenance personnel. Refer to Figure 5-30 to
identify tape path components.

PRESS RESET
BUTTON.

PRESS LOAD/REW

BUTTON.

CARTRIDGE UF ANY)

Will OPEN. TAKE UP
REEL WILL START
TO TURN CW.

TAPE ENTERS
VACUUM COLUMNS
AND LOOPS ARE SET.

AAKER4.8Ml15FT.)
ROM THE BEGINNING
f THE TAPE.
EPEAT THE AUTO LOA

SUPPLY REEL WILL
TURN BACKWARDS

ICCWI A FEW TURNS
ANO THEN ROTATE
FORWARD ICW) AND
EJECT TAPE INTO

THE TAPE PATH

TAKE UP REEL
COMPLETES ABOUT
TEN REVOLUTIONS.

VES
NO

SUPPLY REEL
IACKWINDS THE TAPE
TAKE UP REEL

ANO STOP'S.

COMPLETES ABOUT

VES

TEN REVOLUTIONS.

TAKE UP RUL
STOPS.LOAD FAULT

SUPPLY REEL

LAMP FLASHES ON

BACK WINDS

AND OFF.

All THE TAPE ANO
THEN ROTATES
FORWARD

EJECTING TAPE INTO

BOT MARKER IS TOO FAA FROM BEGINNING Of
TAPE. MARKER SHOULD BE FROM 4.3 TO 4.9 M
04 TO 16 FT.I FROM BEGINNING OF TAPE. AE·
POSITION THE MARKER ANO REPEAT THE AUTOLOAD
PROCEDURE OR. lf IT IS OESIREO TO CONTINUE
OPERATION. ROTATE THE TAKE UP REEL UNTIL
THE BOT MARKER IS ON THE REEL. PERFORM
A MIO-REEL LOAD BY AOTATING THE
TAKE UP REEL TO REMOVE All SLACK IN THE
TAPE. WITH THE TAPE TIGHT PRESS THE
RESET BUTTON ANO THEN THE LOAOIREW BUTTON.

CHECK SECTION
5.9.3.5 FOR PROBABLE
CAUSE. ATTEMPT

REPEAT THE
AUTOLOAD
PROCEDURE
WllH ANOTHER
REEL OF TAPE. IF
THE LOAD SEQUENCE
IS ST1ll
UNSUCCESSFUL. CALL
MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL.

ANOTHER AUTOLOAO.

IF THE AUTOLOAO
PROCEDURE FAILS

AGAIN. REPORT
PROBLEM TO
MAINTENANCE. TO
CONTINUE
OPER•TION,

TRY LOADING THE

TAPE MANUALLY
DONE

Figure 5-29

TU77 Auto-load Sequence

5-98

YES

5.8.3.4

Manual Load -

Check that the tape path is clean.

If a write operation will be performed, install a write enable
ring onto the rear flange of the tape reel.

Place the supply reel in positirin on the upper hub.
Rotate
the
reel
until
it
slips into place, and press the
reel-retaining actuator. The reel should be positioned so
that the tape will unwind if the reel is turned clockwise.

Place the tape leader between
bearing (Figure 5-30).

thread

block

and

the

Ensure that there is no tape slack or sag between
supply reel and thread block 1.

the

NOTE

AHll.-ellll.1

CAlnWIDGE MO'l'Oll
Alll llAllllG 1111. 2

-Ill-

.,_,.

PUCKEll

POCKn

YACWM
CAPITAN

Figure 5-30

TU77 Tape Path and Controls

5-99

air

making

sure

Carefully close the buff er
closed securely.

If loading a 216 or 178 mm (8-1/2 or 7 in) reel, close the
transport front door.
If the reel is 267 mm (10-1/2 in),
leave the transport door open; this disables the auto-load
sequence that would normally occur with a 267 mm reel.

Check that power indicator is on,
applied to the tape transport.

Follow the instructions and check for the events specified in
Figure 5-31.
If the tape fails to load properly, the figure
contains some operator troubleshooting hints that can be tried
before maintenance personnel are called. Ref er to Figure 5-30
to identify tape path components.

door,

indicating

the

door

that

power

PRESS RESET
BUTTON.

INST ALL A BOT
MARKER •.llM 115 FT.I
FROM THE BEGINNING
OF THE TAPE.
REPEAT THE MANUAL
LOAD PROCEDURE.
NO

YES
TAKE UP REEL
COMPLETES ABOUT
TEN REVOLUTIONS.

llOT MARKER IS TOO FAR FROM llEGINNING OF
TAPE. MARKER SHOULD BE FROM •.3 TO •.9M
11 • TO 18 FT.I FROM BEGINNING OF TAPE. RE·
POSITION THE MARKER ANO REPEAT THE MANUAL LOAD
PROCEDURE OR. IF IT IS DESIRED TO CONTINUE
OPERATION. ROTATE THE TAKE UP REEL UNTIL
THE BOT MARKER IS ON THE REEL. PERFORM
A MID-REEL LOAD BY ROTATING THE
TAKE UP REEL TO REMOVE ALL SLACK IN THE
TAPE. WITH THE TAPE TIGHT. PRESS THE
RESET BUTTON AND THEN THE LOAD/REW BUTTON.

TAKE UP REEL

STOPS. LOAD FAULT
TAPE ENTERS
VACUUM COLUMNS
ANO LOOPS ARE
SET.

LIGHT FLASHES ON
ANO OFF.

CHECK SECTION

11.1.3.li FOR PROBABLE

YES

CAUSE. ATTEMPT
ANOTHER MANUAL
LOAO. IF THE
MANUAL LOAD
PRDaOURE FAILS
AGAIN.CAU
MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL

REPEAT THE MANUAL
LOAD PROCEDURE
WITH ANOTHER
REEL OF TAPE.
IF THE LOAD
SEQUENCE IS STILL
UNSUCCESSFUL. CALL
MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL.

DONE

Figure 5-31

TU77 Manual Load Sequence

5-100

YES

5.8.3.5

Probable Causes Of Load Failure -

Check that the buffer door is closed and sealed properly.

Check for ripped, creased, or damaged tape leader.
This
especially critical if an auto-load failure has occurred.
necessary, crimp the end of the tape with a tape crimper.

Check that the write-enable ring is inserted in the tape reel
if a write operation will be performed. The file protect
indicator should be off.

If doing a manual load with a 267 mm (10-1/2 in) reel of tape,
check that the transport front door is open and the auto-load
interlock switch is not pulled out.

If doing an auto-load, check these items.

is
If

A 267 mm (10-1/2 in) reel of tape is on the supply hub.

The supply reel has a wrap around cartridge.
If it does
not, check that the transport door is closed.
If the door
is open, check that the interlock switch is pulled out.

The supply reel has a full reel of tape. The tape must be
between 0.64 and 1.59 cm (1/4 and 5/8 in) from the outer
edge of the reel.

5-101

5.8.3.6

Mid-Reel Load -

A mid-reel load is usually required after a
lost interlock.
1.

power

failure

Rotate the take-up reel to remove all slack in the tape.
NOTE
Do not attempt mid-reel load until all slack
manually removed from the tape between the reels.

Press the RESET button.

Press the LOAD/REW button.

The transport loads tape and starts a reverse operation to BOT.
To stop the transport, press the RESET button. Any other command
may now be given.

5.8.3.7

Unload -

Press the RESET button to terminate any current operation
place the transport off-line.

Press the UNLOAD button.
If the tape is at BOT,
it will
backwind onto the supply reel.
If the tape is at mid-reel, it
will rewind to BOT and then unload (backwind onto the supply
reel).

5-102

and

5.8.3.8

Rewind -

If the LOAD/REW button is pressed when the tape is tensioned and
the transport is off-line, the tape rewinds to BOT.
If the tape
is at BOT when the button is pressed, no action occurs.

5.8.3.9

On-Line/Off-Line -

Pressing the ON LINE button places the transport on-line and
lights the on-line indicator. The transport can accept external
commands if it is on-line, selected, and ready. Pressing the ON
LINE button again will cause the transport to go off-line, turning
off the on-line indicator.
The transport goes off-line if any of the following occur.
An external REWIND UNLOAD command is received.
The vacuum column interlock is broken.
AC power is lost.
The RESET button is pressed.

5-103

5.8.4

Customer Care And Maintenance

5.8.4.1

Customer Responsibilities -

obtaining operating
cleaning supplies.

Supplying
chairs.

supplies,

accessories,

including

magnetic

tape

and

cabinetry,

tables,

Maintaining the required logs and
and accurately.

report

consistently

Making the necessary documentation
convenient to the system.

available

Keeping the exterior of the system and
clean.

the

Ensuring that ac plugs
equipment is used.

plugged

Performing the magnetic tape care and
operations described below.

are

5-104

securely

files
in

location

surrounding
in

preventive

and

each

area
time

maintenance

5.8.4.2

Magnetic Tape Care -

Do not expose magnetic tape to excessive heat or dust.
Most
tape read errors are caused by dust or dirt on the read head.
The tape must be kept clean.

Always store tape reels inside containers when not in use.
Keep the empty containers tightly closed to keep out dust and
dirt.

Never touch the portion of tape between the BOT
markers. Oil from fingers attracts dust and dirt.

Never use a contaminated reel of tape.
A contaminated reel
spreads dirt to clean tape reels and could have an adverse
effect on tape transport reliability.

Always handle tape reels by the hub hole. Squeezing the reel
flanges could lead to tape edge damage in winding or unwinding
tapes.

Do not smoke near the tape transport or storage area.
smoke and ash are especially damaging to tapes.

Do not place magnetic tape near any
device that produces paper dust.

Do not place magnetic tape on top of the tape transport, or in
any other location where it might be affected by hot air.

Do not store magnetic tape near electric motors.

5-105

line

printer

and

EOT

Tobacco
or

other

5.8.4.3

Preventive Maintenance -

Dismount the tape from the unit.

Clean the following components of the transport using a
foam-tipped swab soaked in cleaning fluid. Daily cleaning is
recommended for TU77 units in constant operation. See Figure
5-32.
Read/write head
Erase head
Tape cleaner
Air bearings (6)
Spring-loaded ceramic tape guides (2)
Thread blocks (6)
Capstan
Buffer boxes (2)
Pucker pocket
Buffer box glass, pocket glass, door overlay

NOTE
Use only foam-tipped swabs. Do not touch any part of
the tape path since oil from fingers attracts dust and
dirt.
Also, excessive physical pressure on
the
capstan could affect its alignment.

When cleaning the thread blocks, be sure to clean the air
guide ports.
Every thread block has air guide ports except
the metal block containing the spring-loaded tape guide.

When cleaning the spring-loaded ceramic guides, be sure that
the washer is pressed firmly against the tape guide surface
and not hung up on its shaft.

When cleaning the inner surf ace of the vacuum door,
use a
lint-free wipe and cleaning fluid.
Pass another lint-free
wipe over the head using a polishing action to remove any
remaining deposits.

5-106

THllEAD IL.OCK

Alli IEAlllNG NO 1

AIR BEARING

N0.2

SUPPLY
BUFFER BOX

THREAD BLOCK

AIR BEARING
t-"l\----fr--4~~1
NO. 4

PUCKER
POCKET
TAKE UP
BUFFER BOX
TAPE CLEANER
ERASE HEAD

11~H:l~µ._.-fH-tlt"'= READ/WRITE
w

AIR BEARING NO. 6

HEADS

SPRING LOADED
TAPE GUIDE

VACUUM
CAPSTAN

MA·>e31

a. Tape Path Items

BUFFER
BOX GLASS

POCKET
GLASS

PART OF DOOR
OVERLAY

MA·2U8

b. Buffer Box Door

Figure 5-32

TU77 Transport Items to Clean Daily

5-107

5.9

TU78 MAGNETIC TAPE TRANSPORT

The TU78 magnetic tape transport writes and reads data in 9-track
phase-encoded (PE) or group code recording (GCR) format. Bit
density is 1600 bits per inch for the PE format and 6250 bits/in
for the GCR format. The transport can read data in the forward or
reverse direction. The read/write tape speed for both directions
is 125 inches per second. Nominal rewind time for a 731.5 m (2400
ft) reel is 65 seconds.

5.9.1

TU78 Specifications
Table 5-24

TU78 Specifications

Tape (computer 1rade)
Width

12.6492 mm ± 0.0508 mm (0.498 in ± 0.002
in)
.
0.0381 mm ( 1.5 mil)

Thickness
Tape tension

2. 780 N (10.0 oz +0.0/-1.0 oz) nominal

Reel diameter (autoload)

266.7 mm (10.5 in) maximum (note 1) and
Easy-Load cartridge I and 2

Recording modes

1600 bits/in (3200 FCI) PE
6250 bits/in (9042 FCI) OCR

Magnetic head

Dual stack (with erase head)

Tape speed

3.2 m/s (125 in/s)

Instantaneous speed
variation

±3 percent

Long term speed
variation

± I percent (forward)
±2 percent (reverse)

Rewind time for 731.S m
(2400 fl) tape

65 seconds nominal (80 seconds
maximum)

Tape cleaner

Dual blade type connected to vacuum
supply

lnterchannel displacement
error
Read
Read-after-write

3.81 µm (ISO µin) maximum (note 2)
8.89 µm (350 µin) maximum (note 3)

Start/stop time
Start
Stop

I.I ms± 0.1 ms
1.3 ms± 0.1 ms
I.I ms± 0.1 ms

Start distance

1.91 mm +0.25/-0.38 mm
(0.075 in +0.010/-0.0IS in)

Stop distance

2.16 mm +0.25/-0.38 mm
(0.85 in +0.010/-0.015 in)

5-108

Table 5-24

TU78 Specifications (Cont)

Beginning of tape (BOT) and
end of tape (EOT) detectors
(note 4)

Photoelectric

Tape creepage

None

Pneumatic interlock

Tape motion disabled when vacuum is lost
in vacuum column

Load time

No greater than 10 seconds without a
retry, and 20 seconds with a retry for
10.5 in reels

Unload time

Less than 7 seconds for 10.5 in reels

Write gap to read gap
distance

0.381 cm ± 0.013 cm (0.150 in ± 0.005 in)

Weight

286 kg (630 lbs) (master unit)

Cabinet dimensions
Height
Width
Depth (from face of
front door to rear of
cabinet)

152.4 cm ( 60.0 in)
67.3 cm (26.5 in)
81.9 cm (32.3 in)

Operating temperature
Nonoperating temperature

15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F) (note 5)
-46° to 71° C (-50° to 106° F)

Operating altitude

0 m to 2134 m (0 ft to 7000 ft) (note 6)

Nonoperating altitude

9100 m (30,000 ft) maximum

Power
Volts ac
Frequency
Kilovolt amp (kV A)
Standby (loaded)
Start/stop

188 V to 264 V at 60 Hz
198 V to 264 V at 50 Hz
50 Hz ± I Hz or 60 Hz ± I Hz
1.5 kVA maximum (note 7)
2.4 kV A maximum (note 7)

NOTES
l.
177.8 mm (7 in) and 216.0 mm (8.5 in) reels may be used but cannot be autoloaded.
2.

The maximum displacement between any two bits of a character when reading a master tape using the read
section of the read-after-write bead.

The maximum displacement between any two bits of a character on a tape written with all ones using the write
section of the read-after-write bead.

Approximate distance from detection area to write bead gap is 35.6 mm (l.40 in).

For data transfer, the operating ~emperature is dictated by the nature of the tape material.

Operation above 610 m (2000 ft), in 610 m (2000 ft) increments requires installation of high altitude pulleys
and belts in TU78 power pack.

Slave unit onlv. Add 700 W for master units.

5-109

5.9.2

TU78 Controls And Indicators

The TU78 operator controls and indicators are located on the
control panel (Figure 5-33) on the front of the tape transport.
The controls are described in Table 5-25, the indicators in Table
5-26.

D DODD
-o

PORT

botQ

LOAD/REW

-onlineQ

ON LINE

flle--=rQ

UNLOAD

IOldt.ultQ

RESET

0.A

•* 0

1·1
2-All
3-TEST

Figure 5-33

1aooQ

TU78 Control Panel

5-110

TU 78

Table 5-25

TU78 Controls

COlltrol

Port Select Switch

Selects the MASSBUS 1/0 port(s) allowed to send commands to this tape
transport.
Switch

POlltioll

Function

Transport connected to MASSBUS port A
Transport connected to MASSBUS port B

LOAD/REW

Transport connected to both MASSBUS ports A and B

Transport disconnected from both MASSBUS ports and
placed in maintenance mode (available to TM78 formatter
maintenance panel)

Initiates one of three sequences.
1.

With no tape in path, initiates a load sequence.

With tape in path but not tensioned, initiates a midreel load sequence.
In a midrcel load sequence the tape loads and runs in reverse direction
to BOT.

With tape in path and tensioned, and the transport off-line, the tape
rewinds to BOT. If the tape is already at BOT or if the transport is online, no action occurs.

ONLINE

Switches the transport off-line or on-line.

UNLOAD

If the TU78 is off-line, causes the tape to rewind and unload. If the tape is
already at BOT, it unloads. If the TU78 is on-line, button has no effect.

RESET

Terminates all functions and clears a load fault.

BACKWRAP
DEFEAT

AUTO (automatic) position: Allows a backwrap and retry for 10.5 inch reel,
with or without a cartridge
MAN (manual) position: Inhibits a backwrap and retry for 10.5 inch reel
without a cartridge

5-111

Table 5-26

TU78 Indicators

ladicator
Power

Presence of de and secondary ac power.

BOT

Tape is at BOT.

On Linc

TU78 is on-line. The transport reverts to the off-line mode if any of the following occur.
1.

ON LINE button is pressed:

External rewind unload command is received.

Vacuum column interlock is broken.

AC power is lost.

RESET button is pressed.

File Protect

Tape reel without a write enable ring has been loaded onto the transport.

Load Fault

Load fault has occurred.
1.

Autoload sequence has failed to load a tape from a 267 mm (10.5 in) reel after two
tries.

Load sequence has failed to load tape from a 216 mm or 178 mm (8.5 in or 7 in)
reels.

1600

Tape transport set to read or write at 1600 bits/in (PE mode).

6250

Tape transport set to read or write at 6250 bits/in (GCR mode).

5-112

5.9.3

TU78 Operating Instructions

5.9.3.1

Power -

When the VAX-11/785 is turned on, power is applied to the TU78.
The VAX-11/785 remotely enables the 874-E power control, which in
turn applies ac power to the TU78 cabinet.

5.9.3.2

Auto-load/Manual Load Selection -

Figure 5-34 illustrates various conditions and interlock settings
that determine the selection of an auto-load or manual load
procedure.
START

YES

MANUAL LOAD
PROCEDURE

AUTO LOAD
PROCEDURE
MK\184-1020

Figure 5-34

TU78 Auto-load/Manual Load Selection

5-113

5.9.3.3

Auto-load Procedure -

Check that the tape path is clean.

Check that the tape is a 267 mm (10.5 in) reel, and that it is
a full reel of tape. See Figure 5-35.

Figure 5-35
3.

TU78 Tape Content Limit

Check that the end of the tape has a clean edge and is not
bent, torn, or frayed.
If necessary, trim the end with the
tape crimper (P/N 47-00038).
NOTE
Do not crimp the tape unnecessarily.
Each crimping
shortens the tape leader and could eventually lead to
failures in the auto-load sequence.

5-114

Check that static charge is not causing the end of the tape to
stick to the reel. The end of the tape must be free of the
reel to accomplish auto-load.

If a write operation is to be performed, install
enable ring onto the rear flange of the tape reel.

Place the supply reel in position on the upper hub.
Rotate
the reel until it slips easily into place, and press the reel
retaining actuator. The reel should be positioned so that the
tape unwinds if it is turned clockwise.

Carefully close the buffer
securely.

Close the transport front door.

Check that the tape transport power light is on.

10.

Follow the instructions and check for the events specified in
Figure 5-36.
If the tape fails to load properly, the figure
contains some operator troubleshooting hints that can be tried
before maintenance personnel are called. Refer to Figure 5-37
to identify tape path components.

door.

5-115

Make

sure

write

closed

l'RESS RESET

1unoN.
- I S LOAD/REW

I UTTON.

CARTRIDGE UF ANYt
WILL OPEN. TAKE UP
REEL WILL STAM'

TOTUllNCW.

TAPllNTERI
VACUUM COl.UMNI
AND LOOPS AM llT-

SUPPLY REEL WILL

TURN BACKWARDS
fCCWt A FEW TURNS
AND THEN ROTATE
FORWARD fCWt AND

EJECT TAPE INTO
THE TAPE PATH.
TAKE UP REEL
COMPLETES AIOUT
TEN REVOLUTIONS.
YES
NO

TAKE UPREEL
COMPUTES AllOUT
TEN RIVOLUTi-.

YES

IU,,.LYREEL
IACKWINDI
ALL THE TAPE AND
THEN llOTATEI

FOllWARD
EJECTING TAPE INTO
THETAPE PATH.

YEI

901 MARKEfll IS TOO FAR FROM BEGINNING OF
TAPI. MARKER SffOULD H FROM 4.3 TO 4.1 M
114 TO 11 FT.I FROM IEGINNtNG OF TAI'£. RE·
POSmON THE MARKER AND REPEAT THE AUTOl.OAD
PllOCEDURE DR. IF IT IS DESIRED TO CONTINUE
OPHATION. ROTATE THE TAKE UP RIEL UNTIL
THE BOT MARKER IS ON THE REEL. P E A MlD·REEL LOAD IY ROTA TING THE
TAKE UP RIEL TO RIMOVI ALL SLACK IN THE
TAPE. WITH THE TAPI TIGHT. PRESS THE
RESET IUTTON AND THEN THE LOAD/REW IUTTON.

CHICK llCfKIN

U.U FOR PllO.AILE
CAUSE.ATTEMPT
ANOTHER AUTOLOAD.

T
AUTOl.OAO
PllOCIDIME
WITH ANOT. . R
REIL OF TAPE.IF
THE LOAD llllUINCE
IS STILL
UNIUCXE•FUL. CAU
MMNTINANCE
Pl-NIL.

IF T. . AUTOLOAD
l'llOCEDURE FAILS
AGAIN. REl'Ollf
-LEM TO
-INANCE.TO
CONTINUE

Ol'llATION.
TWYLOA-GTHE
TAPE MANUALLY

Figure 5-36

DONE

TU78 Auto-load Sequence

5-116

YES

.........

AIR BEARING NO 1
SUPPLY REEL
/

CARTRIOGE MOTOR

AIR BEARING NO 2
AIR BEARING NO. 4

SUPPLY
BUFFER BOX

PUCKER
POCKET

TAPE IN PATH
SENSOR
TAKE UP
BUFFER BOX

TAPE CLEANER

Figure 5-37

TU78 Tape Path and Controls

5-117

-·-

5.9.3.4

Manual Load -

Check that the tape path is clean.

If a write operation is to be performed,
install
enable ring onto the rear flange of the tape reel.

3•

Place the tape leader between thread block 1 and air bearing 1
(Figure 5-37).

write

NOTE
Make sure that there is no tape slack or
the supply reel and thread block 1.

sag

between

Close the transport front door.

Check that tape transport power light is on.

Follow the instructions and check for the events specified in
Figure 5-38.
If the tape fails to load properly, the figure
contains some operator troubleshooting hints that can be tried
before maintenance personnel are called. Refer to Figure 5-37
to identify tape path components.

5-118

PRESS RESET
BUTTON.

PRESS LOAOIREW
BUTTON.
INSTALL A BOT
MARKER 4.6M 115 FT.I
FROM THE BEGINNING
OF THE TAPE.
REPEAT THE MANUAL
LOAD PROCEOURE.

TAKE UP REEL
STARTS TO TURN CW.

SUPPLY REEL
ROTATES CW.
NO

YES
TAKE UP REEL
COMPLETES ABOUT
TEN REVOLUTIONS.

SUPPLY REEL
STOPS.

TAPE ENTERS
VACUUM COLUMNS
ANO LOOPS ARE
SET.

YES

BOT MARKER IS TOO FAR FROM BEGINNING OF
TAPE. MARKER SHOULD BE FROM 4.3 TO 4.9M
114 TO 16 FT.I FROM BEGINNING OF TAPE. RE·
POSITION THE MARKER AND REPEAT THE MANUAL LOA
PROCEDURE OR. IF IT IS DESIRED TO CONTINUE
OPERATION. ROTATE THE TAKE UP REEL UNTIL
THE BOT MARKER IS ON THE REEL. PERFORM
A MIO-REEL LOAD BY ROTATING THE
TAKE UP REEL TO REMOVE ALL SLACK IN THE
TAPE. WITH THE TAPE TIGHT. PRESS THE
RESET BUTTON AND THEN THE LOAD/REW BUTTON.

TAKE UP REEL
STOPS. LOAO FAULT
LIGHT FLASHES ON
AND OFF.

CHECK SECTION
5.83.6 FOR PROBABLE
CAUSE. ATTEMPT
ANOTHER MANUAL
LOAD. IF THE
MANUAL LOAD
PROCEDURE FAILS
AGAIN. CALL
MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL.

REPEAT THE MANUAL
LOAD PROCEDURE
WITH ANOTHER
REEL OF TAPE.
IF THE LOAD
SEQUENCE IS STILL
UNSUCCESSFUL. CALL
MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL.

YES

DONE
MKV84-1

Figure 5-38

TU78 Manual Load Sequence

5-119

5.9.3.5

Probable Causes Of Load Failure -

Check that the buffer door is closed and sealed properly.

Check that the front door is closed securely.

Check for ripped, creased, or damaged tape leader.
This
especially critical if an auto-load failure has occurred.
necessary, crimp the end of the tape with a tape crimper.

Check that the write enable ring is inserted in the tape reel
if a write operation is to be performed. The file protect
indicator should be out.

If an auto-load is being performed, check the following.

is
If

A 267 mm (10.5 in) tape reel is on the supply hub

The supply reel has a full reel of tape. The tape must be
between 0.64 cm and 1.59 cm (0.25 in and 0.63 in) from the
outer edge of the reel.

5-120

5.9.3.6

Mid-reel Load -

A mid-reel load is usually required after a power failure or a
lost interlock.
Follow the steps below to perform a mid-reel
load.
1.

Rotate the take-up reel to remove all slack in the tape.
CAUTION
Do not attempt a mid-reel load until all slack
manually removed from the tape between the reels.

Press the RESET button.

Close the front door.

Press the LOAD/REW button.

The transport loads the tape and starts a reverse operation to
BOT.
To stop the transport, press the RESET button. Any other
command may now be given.

5.9.3.7

Unload -

Press the RESET button to terminate any current operation
place the transport off-line.

Press the UNLOAD button.
If the tape is at BOT, it backwinds
onto the supply reel.
If the tape is at mid-reel, it rewinds
to BOT and then unloads.

5.9.3.8

and

Rewind -

Press the LOAD/REW button, with tape tensioned and the transport
off-line, to rewind the tape to BOT. When the button is pressed
with the tape at BOT, no action occurs.

5-121

5.9.3.9

On-Line/Off-Line -

Press the ON LINE button to place the transport on-line.
This
lights the on-line indicator. While on-line, the transport can
accept external commands provided it is selected and ready.
If
the ON LINE button is pressed again, the transport goes off-line.
The on-line indicator goes out. Also, the transport goes off-line
when any of the following conditions occur.
An external rewind unload command is received
Vacuum column interlock is broken
AC power is lost
RESET button is pressed
Front door opens

5.9.4
5.9.4.1

TU78 Customer Care And Maintenance
Customer Responsibilities -

Obtain operating supplies,
cleaning supplies.

Supply accessories, including cabinetry, tables, and chairs.

Maintain the required logs and report files
accurately.

Make the necessary documentation
convenient to the system.

available

Keep the exterior of
clean.

and

Make sure that ac plugs are
equipment is used.

the

including

system

5-122

securely

magnetic

the

tape

consistently
in

and

location

surrounding

plugged

and

each

area
time

5.9.4.2

Magnetic Tape Care.-

Do not expose magnetic tape to excessive heat or dust.
Most
tape read errors are caused by dust or dirt on the read head;
it is imperative that the tape be kept clean.

Always store tape reels inside containers when they are not in
use.
Keep the empty containers tightly closed to keep out
dust and dirt.

Never touch the portion of tape between the BOT
markers. Oil from fingers attracts dust and dirt.

Never use a contaminated reel of tape. This spreads dirt to
clean tape reels and could have an adverse effect on tape
transport reliability.

Always handle tape reels by the hub hole. Squeezing the reel
flanges could lead to tape edge damage in winding or unwinding
tapes.

Do not smoke near the tape transport or storage area.
smoke and ash are especially damaging to tapes.

Do not place magnetic tape near any
device that produces paper dust.

Do not place magnetic tape in any location where it
affected by hot air.

Do not store magnetic tape in the vicinity of electric motors.

5-123

line

printer

and

EOT

Tobacco
or

other

might

5.9.4.3

TU78 Tape Transport Maintenance -

Dismount the tape from the unit.

Clean the following components of the transport using a
foam-tipped swab soaked in cleaning fluid. Daily cleaning is
recommended for TU78 units in constant operation. See Figure
5-39.
Read/write head
Erase head
Tape cleaner
Air bearings (6)
Spring-loaded ceramic tape guides (2)
Thread blocks (6)
Capstan
Buffer boxes (2)
Pucker pocket
Buffer box glass, pocket glass, door overlay

NOTE
Use only foam-tipped swabs. Do not touch any part of
the tape path since oil from fingers attracts dust and
dirt.
Also, excessive physical pressure on
the
capstan could affect its alignment.

When cleaning the thread blocks, be sure to clean the air
guide ports.
Every thread block has air guide ports except
the metal block containing the spring-loaded tape guide.

When cleaning the spring-loaded ceramic guides, be sure that
the washer is pressed firmly against the tape guide surface
and not hung up on its shaft.

When cleaning the inner surf ace of the vacuum door, use a
lint-free wipe and cleaning fluid. Pass another lint-free
wipe over the head using a polishing action to remove any
remaining deposits.

5-124

""' . . , . _ llO. '

PUCUll
POc:lllT
TMIUP
IUl"Hll-

TAl'I CLIAlllll

-MIAO

\olalllii!M--llt-m- -

- l l G ~D
TAPI GUIDI

VACUUM
CAl'ITAN

a. T1pe Padl ltcma

au"'"

-•"'91

PAllT DI' DODll
OVlllLAY

Figure 5-39

TU78 Transport Items to Clean Daily

5-125

5.10

TU80 MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM

The TU80 magnetic tape subsystem is a low-cost, dual-speed 9-track
data storage system.
It is packaged with its formatter and power
controller in a standard 40-inch high H9643 cabinet.
The TU80
writes and reads data in ANSI-compatible phase-encoded (PE)
9-track 1600-bit/inch format. The tape speed is 25 in/s (63.5
cm/s)
in start/stop mode and 25 in/s (63.5 cm/s) or 100 in/s (254
cm/s) in streaming mode.
The TU80 Subsystem consists of the standalone tape transport and a
UNIBUS adapter module.
It plugs into the VAX-11/785 UNIBUS small
peripheral controller (SPC) slot and provides communication with
the corresponding tape transport.
Figure 5-40 shows the TU80 and its major components.

CONTROL
PANEL

\l\111111III111111111II11111111111111111

Figure 5-40

TU80 Tape Subsystem

5-126

5 .lO.l

TUBO Specifications

NOTE
Back-coated magnetic tapes
the TUBO tape drive.
are not recommended for use

Table 5 -2 7

TUBO Specifications

Fanctiomal O..ncteristlcs
Tape speed (nominal)
Low speed start/stop mode
Low speed streaming mode
High speed streaming mode

25 in/s
25 in/s
100 in/s

Tape capacity (maximum)

40 Mbytes

Data transfer rate (burst) Low speed modes
High speed streaming mode

40 Kbyte/s
160 Kbyte/s

Data format/recording

9 track, phase-encoding,
1600 bit/inch

Rewind time (nominal)
Load time (maximum)

2.5 minutes
15 seconds

Electronics

Solid-state

Tape width
Tape thickness
Tape tension

12.65 mm (0.5 in)
38.I micron(l.5mil)
2.23 N (8 oz)

Reel diameter
Reel capacity

26. 7 cm• (10.5 in)
732 m• (2400 ft)

Transport dimensions

105. 7 cm (H) x 54.6 cm (W) x 76.2 cm (0)
41.6 in (H) x 21.5 in (W) x 30 in (D)

Transport weight (in cabinet)

127 kg (280 lbs)

UNIBUS adapter

Standard quad-size module

Power requirement

4Aat +5Vdc

• Smaller tape reels are also allowed.

5-127

Table 5-27

TU80 Specifications (Cont)

Operatioul Cllaracterlstics
Power requirements
Voltage

93-128 Vac, 120 Vac nominal,
60 Hz, single phase
187-256 Vac, 220 or 240 Vac
nominal, 50 Hz, single phase

Current

Average input current 2.0 A nns
at 100 in/s

Power consumption

300 VA- Standby and loaded
SSO VA max - Start/stop

Power controller

Model 8748, 50 Hz, 240 V, 12 A
Model 8740, 60 Hz, 120 V, 24 A

Power cord

3 wire number 12 A WG 16 ft long;
plug - NEMA 6-l 5P (50 Hz)
NEMA 5-30 (60 Hz)

Operating temperaturet
Storage temperature

10° C (50° F) to 40° C ( 104° F)t
- I 0° C ( 14° F) to 50° C ( 122° F)

Relative humidity

20% to 80% (I 0% to 90% in storage)

Altitude

Up to 3048 m (I 0,000 ft) or
688 millibar (9.98 psi)

Heat dissipation (average)

1024 BTU/hr

Acoustical noise

51 dba for open office environment

Data Reliability
Recoverable write error

I in 108 bits

Recoverable read-forward
error

1 in 109 bits

Recoverable read-reverse
error

1 in 108 bits

Unrecoverable read error

1 in 1010

Unrecoverable write error

Not allowed

t Restricted by the operating temperature of the media.
t Operating temperature will be limited by the temperature limitations of the media.
5-128

5.10.2

TU80 Controls And Indicators

The left part of the control panel (Figure 5-41) contains operator
switches and indicators.
The 2-digit display indicates a fault
code related to an abnormal operating condition or a test code
when in the diagnostic mode. The right part of the panel contains
the switches for diagnostic test procedures.

MAINTENANCE

FILE PRO

BOT

SELECT

[E
F

LOAD
REWIND

INDICATOR~

PUSHBUTTON

LOGIC
ON

[ UNLOAD

I:. . I
I[~ESET I

,-, -

I I

C• C•

TWO-DIGIT
LED
DISPLAY

DIAGNOSTICS

C::JC:J
ICJ
[EXECUTE

OPERATOR

Figure 5-41

TUBO Control Panel

5-129

Table 5-28

TU80 Operator Controls

SWITCH/INDICATOR

FUNCTION

LOGIC OFF

Switch - When pressed, power is removed from
the transport logic and LOGIC OFF indicator
goes on.
Indicator - When on, LOGIC OFF indicates a
standby power condition exists (power supply is
on, transport logic is off).
If the indicator is off and no other indicators
are on~ then power switch is set off (0) or
there is a power supply problem.
If this
indicator is off and LOGIC ON indicator is on,
all transport circuitry is in the power-on
condition.

LOGIC ON

Switch - If LOGIC ON is pressed when the power
switch is on (1), the transport logic and
control system is powered up and the TU80 is
ready for operation.
Indicator - When on, LOGIC ON indicates the
transport.is powered up and ready for use.

FILE PRO

Indicator - When on, FILE PRO indicates absence
of a write-enable ring in the supply reel and
write operation is inhibited. Otherwise, write
operations are allowed.

BOT

Indicator - When on, BOT indicates the tape is
positioned at the beginning-of-tape (BOT)
marker.

LOAD/REWIND

Switch - If the transport is powered on and
tape is threaded, pressing this switch causes a
load operation to be performed.
If tape is
loaded, pressing the switch causes a rewind
operation to BOT.

5-130

Table 5-28

TU80 Operator Controls (Cont)

SWITCH/INDICATOR

FUNCTION

UNLOAD

Switch - If tape is loaded at BOT, pressing
this switch causes tape to unload from the
take-up reel and tape path onto the supply
reel. If tape is threaded, but not loaded,
pressing the switch causes the transport to
slowly unload tape onto the supply reel.

ON-LINE

Switch - If tape is loaded, pressing this
switch causes the transport to go on-line to
the host system. Press the RESET switch to
take the TUBO off-line.

SELECT

Indicator - When on, indicates the following.
- The address in TU80 and CPU are the same.
- When the two I/0 cables are disconnected, thE
address decoder in TU80 is functional.
- Pin 1 in I/O cables and Pin 1 on the M7454
are assembled correctly.
- TU80 is not in diagnostic mode.

RESET

Switch - When pressed, this switch places the
transport off-line, stops tape motion, and
clears error status. The switch can stop a
LOAD or REWIND operation. It also turns off
the RESET indicator and clears diagnostic test
condition.
Indicator - When on, RESET indicates that the
transport is in fault or diagnostic status.
Two-digit display may contain a fault or
diagnostic code.

5-131

Table 5-29

TU80 Diagnostic Controls

SWITCH/INDICATOR

FUNCTION

DIAGNOSTIC

Indicator - When on, DIAGNOSTIC indicates that
the transport is in the diagnostic/test mode.
The indicator remains on until the RESET switch
is pressed.

TEST

Switch - If the transport has tape threaded but
not loaded, pressing this switch places the
unit in the diagnostic/test mode.

STEP

Switch - If the transport is in the
diagnostic/test mode (and the test number is
displayed), pressing this switch allows the
diagnostic/test sequence numbers in the
two-digit display to increment by one.

EXECUTE

Switch - If the transport is in the
diagnostic/test mode (and the test number is
displayed), pressing this switch initiates the
internal diagnostic test shown on the two-digit
display.

Switch - If the transport is in the
diagnostic/test mode, this switch helps run
Field Service Diagnostics.

Operator's Hints
1.

When the LOGIC ON indicator is on, all control panel switches
and indicators are functional except the LOGIC OFF indicator.

The ON-LINE switch can be pressed while the tape
The TU80 goes on-line immediately when loaded.

When the RESET indicator is on, the control panel is not
operable except for the LOGIC OFF and RESET switches. Press
the RESET switch to turn off the RESET indicator.

Tape unloading is performed at low speed.
procedure press LOAD REWIND, then UNLOAD.

5-132

speed

the

5.10.3
5.10.3.1

TU80 Operating Instructions
Inserting Write-Enable Ring -

Before mounting the reel of tape onto the supply hub, determine if
the tape is to be recorded.
If write operations are to be
performed, place a write-enable ring into the bottom recessed
portion of the reel (Figure 5-42).
WRITE

ENABLE
RING

l(;)Z,,

WRITE

ENABLE
RING
GROOVE

REEL

Figure 5-42

....Write Enable Ring

5-133

5.10.3.2

Tape Threading And Loading NOTE
The circuit breaker on the 874 power
be ON.

controller

must

Pull the cover latch toward the front and lift the top access
cover.
Check that the power switch is ON (1 pressed). The
LOGIC OFF indicator should be on.
NOTE
The power switch can be left in the ON position to
enable the TU80 transport to be powered-on under CPU
control.

Press the LOGIC ON switch.
The power-up health check is
initiated.
The LOGIC OFF indicator goes off and all other
indicators momentarily go on.
The LOGIC ON and FILE PRO
indicators should remain on.
NOTE
Pressing the LOGIC ON switch enables the transport
power amplifier module, control logic, and support
circuits.
If a fault code displays at this time,
press the RESET and LOGIC OFF switches and then the
LOGIC ON switch again to repeat the check.

Press the inner button on the face of the supply reel hub.

Mount the supply reel onto the hub so that the reel is seated
on the bottom flange.
Secure the reel by pressing the
periphery of the hub face to latch the reel.

Thread magnetic tape through the tape path as shown in
5-43.

5-134

Figure

Figure 5-43
6.

TU80 Tape Path

Wrap the tape leader (a length of tape before the BOT
onto the take-up reel for several turns.

marker}

CAUTION
Make sure that the tape is positioned correctly over
all tape path components, otherwise tape damage may
occur.

Close and latch the top cover.

Press the LOAD/REWIND switch.
In one second air pressure
builds at the air bearings and the tape starts moving forward.
This motion stops when the BOT marker on the tape is detected.
If
the tape was over-threaded and the BOT marker was
positioned after the sensor, forward tape motion continues for
approximately 40 feet. Then the transport initiates reverse
tape motion until the BOT marker is detected. At this moment,
tape motion stops and the BOT indicator is on.

5-135

.Press the ON-LINE switch to place the unit on-line to the
VAX-11/785.
The switch may be pressed while the load
operation is in progress. On completion of a load operation,
the transport indicates ON-LINE status by turning the ON-LINE
indicator on.
(If the transport· is ready for a write
operation, the FILE PRO indicator goes off.) Now the transport
is ready for use.

5-136

Tape Unloading
Manual Mode
1.

Press the RESET switch to place the transport off-line.

Press the UNLOAD switch.
The tape now moves in reverse
(rewind), gently winding onto the supply tape reel until it
clears the take-up reel and the tape path.
NOTE
If the tape is
rewinds to BOT.

loaded

beyond

the

BOT

marker,

Open the top cover and press the center button of the supply
reel hub.
The hub unlatches and the supply reel can be
removed.

Close the top cover to prevent dust accumulation on
deck components.

the

tape

On-Line Mode
the UNLOAD operation can be
When on-line to the VAX-11/785,
performed under CPU control by the TU80. To remove the reel,
perform steps 3 and 4 above.

5-137

5.10.3.3

Operator Corrective Actions -

When the LOGIC ON switch is pressed, the TU80 transport initiates
a built-in power-on health check.
If a fault occurs that cannot
be corrected by the VAX-11/785 and the transport takes itself
off-line, the operator is informed of the fault by the fault code
in the two-digit display. Refer to Table 5-30 for the list of
fault codes and corresponding corrective actions.
The operator can check the TU80 transport operating condition
using the built-in basic Diagnostic Test 01. This test checks the
basic operating functions of the transport, and it can verify a
malfunction when a fault code indicates transport failure. Table
5-30 lists fault codes and operator corrective actions.
Table 5-30

TU80 Operator Corrective Actions

Fault Code

Correcti•e Action

01-09

Clean the magnetic head and tape path following instructions in Chapter 4 of this manual.

Make sure the top cover is securely closed

Thread the tape.

Latch the supply reel hub.

Thread the tape correctly as shown on the tape threading diagram.

Check for BOT marker on tape. Attach BOT/EOT marker following instructions in
Chapter4.

This fault code indicates that the RESET switch was pressed inadvertently. Reinitiate the
test.

Check for presence of the write-enable ring in the supply tape reel. Install the ring if not
present.

Check for presence of EOT marker. Attach EOT marker following instructions in
Chapter 4.

Indicates that the tape was loaded when the test was initiated. Thread the tape, but DO
NOT press LOAD switch.

20-29

Mount a tape of known good quality.

All others

Attempt to run Diagnostic Test 01 (refer to Chapter 3) and then report a fault code to Field
Service.

5-138

5.10.4
5.10.4.1

TU80 Customer Care And Maintenance
Customer Responsibilities -

Obtaining operating
cleaning supplies.

supplies,

including

Keeping the exterior of the system and
clean.

magnetic

tape

and

surrounding

area

Making sure that ac power plugs are securely plugged in
time the equipment is used.

every

Performing the specific operations
for
equipment
care
described in this section at the suggested periods, or more
often if usage and environment warrant.

the

Also, it is recommended that the customer:
1.

Maintain the required logs and report files
accurately.

Make the necessary documentation
convenient to the system.

5-139

available

consistently
in

and

location

5.10.4.2

Care Of Magnetic Tape -

Do not expose magnetic tape to excessive heat or dust.
Most
tape read errors are caused by dust or dirt on the read/write
head.
It is important to keep the tape clean.

Always store the tape reels inside their containers when the
tape is not in use. Keep all empty containers tightly closed
to guard against dust and dirt.

Never touch the portion of tape between the BOT
markers. Oil from fingers attracts dust and dirt.

Never use a contaminated reel of tape. This spreads dirt to
the clean tape reels and could adversely affect tape transport
reliability.

Always handle tape reels by the hub hole. Squeezing the reel
flanges leads to tape edge damage when winding or unwinding
tapes.

Do not smoke near the tape transport or storage area.
smoke and ash are especially damaging to tapes.

Do not place magnetic tape near line printers or other devices
that produce paper dust.

Do not place magnetic tape in any location
affected by hot air.

Do not store magnetic tape near electric motors or
magnetic sources that may erase data.

5-140

where

and

it
any

EOT

Tobacco

may

other

5.10.4.3

Tape Transport Customer Maintenance -

Before cleaning the tape transport, remove the supply reel
store it properly. When cleaning, be gentle but thorough.

and

CAUTION
Do not use acetone, lacquer thinner, rubbing
trichlorethylene to clean the tape path.

alcohol,

Magnetic Tape Transport Cleaning Kit
Unscrew the top from the cleaning fluid can and punch a small hole
in the metal seal covering the pour spout.
WARNING
When using DECmagtape cleaning fluid, avoid excessive skin
contact and contact with the eyes. Do not swallow it.
Use the cleaning fluid only in a well-ventilated area.

CAUTION
When cleaning the tape equipment, never dip a dirty
cleaning swab or wipe into the can. Instead pour a little
fluid onto the swab or wipe.
Use the smallest amount of cleaning fluid necessary.
NOT soak the swab or wipe in the cleaning fluid.

Always keep the can of fluid tightly closed when not in use;
fluid evaporates rapidly when exposed to air.

5-141

the

Use the cleaning materials from the kit to clean tape heads,
tape
guides, tape cleaner, and any part of the drive where residue
could contact the tape. To clean other parts of the drive, such
as the exterior tape deck surfaces or doors, use any clean,
lint-free material with or without cleaning fluid.
CAUTION
To clean exterior surfaces, use only soap and water.

A mild soap and water solution can be used on any unusually
stubborn dirt that resists the cleaning fluid. After using soap,
be sure to wash the area thoroughly with cleaning fluid to remove
the soap residue.

5-142

Reflective Tape Markers
Every reel of magnetic tape must have BOT and EOT reflective
markers, which enable the transport to recognize starting and
stopping areas. Tapes are always supplied with reflective markers
attached. However, if the markers become detached for any reason,
or if a tape leader is shortened because of tape damage, then the
operator must install a marker at th~ position shown in Figure
5-44.

HUllNO

01T
25FT.

TAPE

]_J

EOT

-::."'

EDGE CLOSEST
TO OPERATOR

r~~

t'tt2 FT.

SHINY
BACKSIDE

BOT

·~lo
,

Figure 5-44

RIM END
CBEGINNINGI

BACK
SIDE

MAGNETIC~HUB

SIDE

\ _...;

END

RIM
END'
FRONT VIEW
OF TAPE WIND

--·

Reflective Tape Markers

5-143

Transport Cleaning
All transport components that need regular cleaning are located on
the tape deck.
These components include the magnetic head
assembly, EOT/BOT sensor, tape cleaner, and air bearings.
Also,
the user should regularly examine and clean, as required, the top
of the tape deck, reel hubs, and top cover door.
To access the magnetic head components (Figure 5-45), pull up
two-part head assembly dust cover from the tape deck.
OUST COVERS

MAGNETIC MEAD

Figure 5-45

TAPE CLEANER

LOWER AIR
eEAIUNG

uPl'ER AIR
eEARING

IOT /BOT SENSOR

TU80 Magnetic Head and Tape Path Components

5-144

the

Magnetic Heads
1.

Clean the magnetic head working surface with a soft
wipe moistened with the cleaning fluid.

lint-free

NOTE
Wipe the head surface in the same direction that the
tape travels during data recording (forward motion).

Clean the area adjacent to the head of any dirt
transported with the tape.

that

can

with

the

Air Bearings
1.

Clean both air
cleaning fluid.

bearings

with

swab

moistened

Make sure that the foil area, guide springs, and both tape
guides
are cleared of any oxide or dirt buildup.
If
available, use a small mirror to inspect the inner edge of the
guides.

Top Cover, Tape Deck, and Head Assembly Dust Covers
To prevent the transfer of dirt to the tape components, DO NOT
allow dust or dirt to accumulate on the inside of the dust cover.
Clean the inside cover surface with a clean, lint-free wipe and
any cleaning fluid that is safe for plastic, painted surfaces.

5-145

APPENDIX A
VIRTUAL MEMORY CONCEPTS

Virtual memory provides major advantages over traditional computer system designs. Virtual memory
benefits are:
I.

2.
3.
4.

Allows the user to run programs larger than the size of real memory
Eliminates overlays
Is transparent to the user
Provides direct improvement in performance as real memory is added.

The programmer is freed from restrictive programming practices and memory constraints. However,
the programmer may fine-tune program performance and efficiency.
The following paragraphs develop some basic concepts (of virtual memory systems) that are prerequisite to an understanding of the VAX-11
system design.

A.1

VIRTUAL ADDRESS

A source program is composed of data and instructions that are processed by a compiler or assembler
to produce executable code. During compiling or assembly, the data and instructions of the program
are allocated virtual addresses (addresses used to identify or represent memory locations). For example, in Figure A-1, source Program A is processed and allocated virtual addresses that start at
address 0 and continue through address 1000.

PROGRAM B
PROGRAM A

OBJECT CODE

SOURCE CODE

DISK

DATA
DATA

INSTRUCTION

INSTRUCTIONS

1000-----'

PROGRAM
VIRTUAL
ADDRESS
TK-OM3

Figure A·I

Program Virtual Address

A-I

For the object program to be executed it must be loaded into physical memory. The simplest kind of
program loading is absolute program loading. A software program called an absolute loader loads the
object program into the same physical addresses as the program's virtual addresses. In this case, the
virtual address is the same as the physical address. Additional mechanisms in the hardware and software are required to make the virtual address anything different from the physical address.
A system that uses absolute loading has limited flexibility because a program is always loaded into the
same physical addresses as its virtual addresses. Separately compiled or assembled routines all start
with virtual address 0. To combine several routines into one program, the addresses of each routine
must be changed so they do not conflict.
A.2 PROGRAM LINKING
Linking is the process of combining object programs (e.g., a main routine and several subroutines).
The linker program relocates (changes) the virtual addresses of each routine to prepare the combined
programs for loading into memory. The programmer can instruct the linker to assign specific virtual
addresses to programs, so that two or more programs will not use the same virtual addresses.
This kind of relocation is static address relocation (done at link time), and is the linking prqc;ess
available in systems that have no memory management or relocation hardware. Static address relocation can be used also to resolve addressing conflicts between separate programs when they reside
concurrently in unmapped physical memory. This technique is used by multiprogramming operating
systems.
··
A.3 MAPPING
Dynamic address relocation (sometimes called mapping) is done after program loading. Mapping
continually relocates addresses in the program during program execution. Special mapping hardware
is used to change a program's virtual addresses into physical addresses used by the hardware.
Figure A-2 shows three separate programs, A, 8, and C, each of which has different virtual memory
requirements starting at address 0.

PHYSICAL
MEMORY
.---------.o

0 _____________.1000
EXECUTABLE
PROGRAMS

MAPPING
HARDWARE

A .,...__ _ _ _ _41

2000
0

8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

---------45000

2000
0

o.,..._-----~sooo

c .,..._______...,.

2000
VIRTUAL
ADDRESS

c
CONTINUOUS
TRANSLATION
DURING
EXECUTION

3000---------49000
PROGRAM
VIRTUAL
ADDRESS

PHYSICAL
ADDRESS
TK·OIMO

Figure A-2

" .,

Mapping

A benefit of mapping hardware is that a program can be run in different areas of physical memory
without relinking. ,.he relocation is done at run-time by special mapping hardware. The hardware is
very fast and does not significantly degrade the performance of the program.
A.4 MULTIPROGRAMMING
In order to make full use of computer hardware. it is often desirable to have several programs in
memory concurrently. This technique is called multiprogramming. Mapping is often used to resolve
address conflicts between programs in a multiprogramming environment.
A.S MEMORY FRAGMENTATION
Memory fragmentation is a problem that occurs when the available memory is broken into segments
that are too small to accommodate each program in its entirety.
Figure A-3 shows three executable programs, A, 8, and C. Program A is 4000 bytes long, Bis 4000
bytes long, and C is 2000 bytes long. The available physical memory in this example is 11000 bytes, so
there is clearly sufficient physical memory to hold all three programs. However, if program A has been
loaded at address 1000 and Bat address 6000 as shown here, there is no single contiguous 2000 byte
area for C.

EXECUTABLE
PROGRAMS

PHYSICAL
MEMORY

O t - - - - - 1 1000
A
4000 1 - - - - - t 5000

0
4000

O i - - - - - t 6000
B
4000 1 - - - - - t 10000

20DO

VIRTUAL
ADDRESSES

00c
- - - --

11000
PHYSICAL
ADDRESSES
Tl(.QS•1

Figure A-3

Physical Memory Fragmentation

One solution employed, when holes develop in memory is to shuffle programs toward one end of
memory, leaving a contiguous area of available memory at the other end.
Another solution is to map programs in segments that are smaller than the entire program.
A.6 NONCONTIGUOUS MAPPING
Although programs have been shown as being mapped as a single unit, it is not a requirement that the
program be mapped as one unit.
Breaking the program into units and mapping the units separately is called noncontiguous mapping.
Because the program is mapped in several pieces, the program need not be loaded in contiguous
memory. Mapping executable programs in small increments reduces the problem of memory fragmentation because there is a higher probability of finding areas of memory that are large enough to hold
the smaller units of a program.

A-3

A.7 PAGED MAPPING
A logical extension of the concepts of noncontiguous mapping is the concept of paged mapping. Paged
mapping refers to the mapping of programs and data in units that have a fixed length. These units are
called pages.

Mapping a program in pages further reduces memory fragmentation. Since memory is mapped in
equal length pages, all free memory is divided into pages and is the correct size for pages to be loaded.
Figure A-4 illustrates a program composed of three sections. main routine A. ana subroutines 8 and
C. These routines are subdivided into fixed length pieces (pages); A is shown as being two pages long,
8 four pages long, and C two pages long.

PHYSICAL MEMORY

O --P-RO_G_RA_M_
A
.,...._.._ __

512

10001------t

4000----VIRTUAL
AOORESSES
PHYSICAL ADDRESSES

Figure A-4

Paged Mapping

Mapping hardware can now locate each page separately.
One of the benefits of mapping, and paged mapping in particular. is the ability for programs to easily
share data or code. The specification of data or code to be shared is done explicitly by the programmer
at link time. When the programs are physically loaded into memory. the operating system recognizes
those pages to be shared between two or more programs and maps the common data or code to the
same area of physical memory.
So far, discussion has been limited to situations in which the virtual memory requirements of the
program(s) involved do not exceed the physical memory capabilities of the system. What if a program's virtual memory requirement is greater than the available physical memory of the system?
A.8 OVERLAYING
Overlay structures have been used to overcome the limitation of not enough memory. Overlays arc
logical segments of a program and are specified at link-time. The overlay structure defines a roo1
section (which is always resident in memory), and two or more overlay sections (which are loaded intc
the same memory during program execution).

In Figure A-5. the root section is linked for addresses 0-1000, each overlay is linked for addresse:
1000-2000. In this scheme, overlays IA and l 8 share the same physical memory, but at different time
during the execution of the program. The overlay (either lA or 18) is loaded from disk as needed.

EXECUTABLE
PROGRAM
PHYSICAL MEMORY

o·
ROOT
1000

ROOT

OVERLAY
IA
OVERLAY
1B

2000
1000
2000

-----1000
OVERLAY
AREA
1-----~2000

VIRTUAL ADDRESSES
VIRTUAL
ADDRESSES

PHYSICAL
ADDRESSES
TIC·O.U

Figure A·5

Overlays

A different type of overlay scheme can be used when the available physical memory is larger than the
virtual address space (Figure A-6).

PHYSICAL MEMORY
EXECUTABLE
PROGRAM
o--....;.
_ __

Ot--------~1000

ROOT
ROOT

t--------~2000

1000-----OVERLAY
IA

20001------~
1000

OVERLAY
1B
2000.....__ _ _ _- - J

__......._,OR

///

---------13000
OVERLAY
1A

20001--------~4000

............. _ _

1~00--------15000

MAPPING

OVERLAY

HARDWARE

20001-----l-B---~6000

VIRTUAL
ADDRESSES

Figure A-6

PHYSICAL
ADDRESSES

Mapping Overlays

This ex.ample shows the same root and overlay sections: but in this case, mapping hardware does
continual virtual to physical address translation at run time. Overlays l A and l B may be in physical
memory at the same time. The programmer must still define the overlay structure at link time. This
process is known as the in-core overlay technique, which is implemented by program logical address
space (PLAS).
Thus, defining overlay structures and using overlay mapping are two ways of circumventing the problem of small virtual memory. However, in each case, it is the programmer's responsibility to plan and
specify an overlay structure and to ensure that it works properly.
A.9

PROCESS

Programs on the VAX-11
system are run as part of a process. A process is like a task on other
systems. When a program is running, it is known to VAX/VMS as a process.

A-5

A.10 PAGING
As the concept of overlaying has implied, it is not necessary to have all of a program resident in
memory at one time. In fact, only those segments that are actually required for execution at any given
time need be resident.

In the VAX-11
system, the set of segments. called pages, that reside in memory for any given
process is called the process working set. Usually the working set is a subset of the total number of
pages of the entire process. and will change over time as the program runs.
As a process executes. pages are brought into memory as required. Eventually, as execution proceeds,
the process references pages that are not in memory. Whenever a process references a page not in
memory. a page fault occurs. In order for execution to continue, the required page must be brought
into memory. This is done by the operating system, which is transparent to the user. This is calle~
paging.
As shown in Figure A-7, pages move back and forth between a file on disk and physical memory under
the control of a page fault handler, which is part of the operating system.

PHYSICAL

MEMORY

P<\GING FILE
PAGE our

\
UPDATE
\
'\.

PAGE TABLE
FOR
PROGRAM
TK·Os.6

Figure A-7

Paging

On the VAX-1 t
operating system, all processes have a maximum working set size established for
them. The maximum working set size is the total number of pages that a particular process may have
resident in physical memory at any given time. The maximum working set for each process is decided
by the system manager, based on both total number of users and the size of physical memory.
In order to avoid exceeding the maximum working set size for a process, a page from the current
working set of the process may have to be removed.
The VAX-1 l
..ises process-oriented paging. It discards least-used pages from the process in operation in order to make room for new pages. This is called paging against the process. Because a process
in VAX/VMS pages only against itself, performance of individual processes can be controlled by the
user. The performance of each process is more predictable than with system-wide paging.

A.I I SWAPPING
In a multiprogramming system, where two or more processes may be in physical memory at the same
time, the term balance set is used to define the number of processes that are in memory. The balance
set may be less than or equal to the total number of active processes in the system.
The number of processes in the balance set is controlled by the system and is determined by the
amount of available physical memory. The system tries to balance the number of active processes in
memory against the resources that are available to serve them.
It is the function of the scheduler, a system service, to select one process for execution from those
processes currently in the balance set.
Figure A-8 shows five processes A, 8, C, 0, and E, all currently active. However, only the working sets
of processes A, 8, and C are in physical memory (i.e., in the balance set). The working sets of processes
D and E are not in physical memory; consequently, processes D and E are not in the balance set.

PHYSICAL MEMORY
A

BALANCE
SET

exec

FREE
PAGE
LIST

B
SWAP FILE

T'IC.-~·.

Figure A-8

Balance Set

In order for nonresident processes D or E to be scheduled to execute, they must first be brought into
the balance set. To avoid exceeding the number of programs allowed in the balance set processes D
and E must be substituted (swapped) for active processes already in the balance set.
Swapping, then, is the moving of entire working sets between physical memory and disk so that a
nonresident process can be scheduled to execute.
Note the contrast between swapping and paging. Swapping is the moving of the working set (i.e., all
the pages that make up the working set) of a process to allow a new process to be scheduled. Paging is
the replacement of just a single page to allow a single process to continue to execute.

A-7

APPENDIX B
BOOTSTRAPPING SEQUENCES

The VAX-I I
system can be bootstrapped from a number of sets of conditions. Operator participation in the bootstrapping operation is limited. All bootstrap sequences are performed with the
control panel key selector switch in the LOCAL position.
Console and CPU power is applied and the AUTO RESTART switch is OFF. This is an automatic
bootstrap sequence that is performed when power is applied. When completed. the console subsystem
is booted and operating in the console 1/0 mode. The CPU subsystem is not booted. The sequence for
~
this bootstrap is as follows.
I.

Apply power to the console and CPU subsystems. Set the five position rotary key selector
switchtoLOCAL.(Disk RXlA rnustbeinstalledinthe RXOldiskdrive.:

The console boot program (resident in the LSI-I I ROM) is initiated.

The console boot begins loading the console program from the disk to the LSI-I I RAM.
When loading is completed. the console program is executed.

The console boot displays the VAX-11
is printed on the terminal

:itatus. During this operation. the following data

CPU HAL TED. SOMM CLR
5.

The console is placed in the console 1/0 mode of operation. The CPU is initialized to the
architecture defined state. When the initializing of the CPU is completed. the following data
is printed on the terminal
!NIT SEQ DONE
HALTED AT 00000000

The WCS/ECO microcode is loaded from the disk to the writable control store ( WCS) area
in the CPU subsystem. When the WCS is loaded. the following data is printed on the terminal
(RELOADING WCS)
LOAD DONE, NNN BYTES LOADED

The console program tests the status of the AUTO RESTART switch. If the switch is ON.
skip to the sequence described in the next paragraph (Step 8). If the switch is OFF. continue
to Step 8 of this paragraph.

B-1

The console remains in the console 1/0 mode of operation and the terminal prints

>>>
This is an input prompt signifying that the console subsystem is booted and operator console command language commands can be entered.
Console and CPU power is applied and the AUTO RESTART switch is ON. This is an automatic
is
boot sequence that is performed when the power is applied. When completed, the VAX-11
booted and operated in the program 1/0 mode. The sequence for this bootstrap is as follows.
1.-7.

This is the same sequence as described in Steps 1 through 7 of the preceding paragraph.

The console program initiates the restart referee program (contained in a CPU ROM) and
the following is printed by the terminal
(AUTO RESTART)

The restart referee tests to determine if this is a cold start or a warm start.

10.

If this boot is part of a warm start, the restart referee goes to VAX/VMS/SEP restart vector
and the following is printed on the terminal

VAX/VMS/SEP prompt
The VAX-11 is ready for user input.
11.

If this boot is part of a cold start. the restart referee returns to the console program to obtain
the default reading for the system load device.

12.

The VAX-IL
primary boot (on the RXOl disk) is loaded to VAX-11 memory and
started. The console enters program 1/0 mode.

13.

The VAX-11
primary boot initiated the memory sizer. The me~ory sizer searches memory for 128K bytes of contiguous main memory.

B-2

APPENDIX C
BOOTSTRAP HELP FILE

BOOT.HLP - VAX-11/785 Bootstrap Help File
Rev 0.2, 02-Nov-1983
Copyright (c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation,
Tewksbury, Massachusetts
To abort printing, type

~c.

This file describes the input parameters to the bootstrap program
VMB.EXE. Normally the bootstrap will look up the file SYSBOOT.EXE
in [SYSEXE] on the specified device,
load it to memory,
and
transfer control to it.
To perform a normal, non-interactive boot from standard
use the BOOT (abbreviation: B) command as shown below:

devices,

! Boot RK07 unit n
BOOT DMn
(ie: B DM3 boots RK07 unit 3 using DMBOO.CMD)
! Boot RM03 or RP06 unit n
BOOT DBn
(ie: B DB2 boots RM03/RP06 unit 2 using DBBOO.CMD)

The console reads the specified device from the boot command line.
If the third character is an integer in the range from 0-7, then
it strips off the unit number and deposits it to R3, and executes
the appropriate ddBOO.CMD command file.
Two-character device
names are handled in a similar manner;
the console assumes a unit
number of zero. Else, the console searches for nnnBOO.CMD, (where
nnn was the three-character sequence following the boot command).
The BOOT command
Supervisor:

also

used

boot

with

the

Diagnostic

! Boot with DS from RK07 unit n
BOOT SMn
(ie: B SM2 boots the DS with RK07 unit 2 using SMBOO.CMD)
! Boot with DS from RM/RP unit n
BOOT SBn
(ie: B SB5 boots the DS with RP/RM unit 5 using SBBOO.CMD)

To perform
parameters,
files, first
the filename

a boot which stops in SYSBOOT to alter system
the ddGEN.CMD command files are used. To use these
deposit the required unit number to R3,
then invoke
as an indirect command file as shown below:

DB-class disks:

>>> D R3 5
! Selects unit 5.
>>> @DBGEN
! Interactive boot file for RM/RP disks.
OM-class disks: >>> D R3 0
! Selects unit 0.
>>> @DMGEN
! Interactive boot file for RK disks.

C-1

The bootstrap is loaded into memory at least one page above the
first available working memory to allow space for the Restart
Parameter Block. The address of the base of the bootstrap is
passed through SP, the stack pointer, where it also serves as a
temporary stack pointer.
Input Parameters:
RO - Boot Device Type Code (RPB$B DEVTYPE)
<07:00> 0 => Disk Pack
- (RM03/RP04/RP05/RP06/RP07)
1 => Cartridge Disk (RK06/RK07)
2 => RLOl/2
17 => UDA-50
32 => HSC on CI
64 => Console Block Storage Device
<15:08> Reserved to DIGITAL
<31:16> Device Class Dependent (RPB$W ROUBVEC)
UNIBUS - Optional vector address,
0 implies use the default vector
MASSBUS - N/A
Rl - Boot Device Bus Address:
<31:04> MBZ
<03:00> TR number of the Adaptor
R2 - UNIBUS: <31:18> MBZ
<17:03> Offset UNIBUS address of Control Register
<02:00> MBZ
MASSBUS:<31:04> MBZ
<03:00> Controller/Formatter Number
CI:
<31:08> MBZ
<07:00> HSC Port Number (Station Address)
R3 - UNIT:

<31:04> MBZ
<03:00> Unit Number

R4 - Logical Block Number to read as secondary boot block if bit 3
(RPB$V_BBLOCK) is set in R5.
R5 - Software Boot Control flags
Bit

Meaning

RPB$V CONV: Conversational boot. At various points
durTng the system boot procedure, input will be
solicited from the console.

RPB$V_DEBUG: VMS will map the XDELTA debugger into
system page tables of the running system.

C-2

th~

RPB$V INIBPT: Initial breakpoint. If <l> is also set
then a breakpoint will occur immediately after mapping
is enabled.

RPB$V BLOCK: Boot block. The secondary boot block
(whose logical block number is in R4) will be read and
control will be transferred to it.

RPB$V DIAG: Diagnostic boot. Boot the Diagnostic
Supervisor ([SYSMAINT]DIAGBOOT.EXE).

RPB$V BOOBPT: Bootstrap breakpoint. Stops the primary
and-secondary bootstraps at a breakpoint before
testing memory.

RPB$V HEADER: Image header. If set, the transfer
address for the secondary boot image will be taken
from its image header. If NOT set, transfers control
the first byte of the secondary boot file.

RPB$V NOTEST: Memory test inhibit. Sets a bit in PFN
bit-map for each page of memory present but does not
test the memory.

RPB$V SOLICT: VMB will prompt for the name of the
secondary bootstrap file.

RPB$V HALT: A HALT instruction will be executed before
control transfers to the secondary bootf ile.

RPB$V_NOPFND: (Not used)

RPB$V MPM: Multi-port memory is to be used for the total
executive memory requirement. No local memory is
used. If bit <5> is also on, Diagnostic Supervisor
will enter "autotest" mode.

RPB$V USEMPM: The multiport memory should be used in
addition to local memory as single memory.

RPB$V MEMTEST: More exhaustive test of memory should be
used when checking for uncorrectable errors.

RPB$V FINDMEM: Use MA780 memory when MS780 memory is
insufficient for booting.

31:28

RPB$V TOPSYS: Specifies the top level directory number
for-system disks with multiple systems.

C-3

SP - ADDRESS+(AX200) of first working 64Kb memory region usable as
both stack pointer and pointer to good memory.
Output parameters:
RlO - Base address of region containing secondary bootstrap
Rll - Pointer to Restart Parameter Block (RPB)
SP

- Stack Pointer

PR$_SCBB - System Control Block base register
Memory layout at start of secondary bootstrap:
+--------------------------------------+ :BASE
Restart Parameter Block (RPB)
+--------------------------------------+ :BASE+AX200
Primary Bootstrap Code
+--------------------------------------+ :PR$_SCBB
System Control Block
+--------------------------------------+ :PFNMAP
I
I
PFN Bitmap
I
+--------------------------------------+ :PFNMAP+Axaoo
I
I
Bootstrap Stack
I
+--------------------------------------+ :(SP)
I
I
Secondary Bootstrap Code
I
+--------------------------------------+

C-4

APPENDIX D
CONSOLE HELP FILE

CONSOL.HLP - VAX-11/785 Console Help File
Rev: 0.2, 03-Nov-1983
Copyright (c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation,
Tewksbury, Massachusetts
To abort printing, type ~c.
For boot information, type '@BOOT.HLP'
. For error message help, type '@ERROR.HLP'
For Remote Diagnostics access help, type '@REMOTE.HLP'
Syntax:

All commands are terminated by carriage return.
All commands may be abbreviated to the capitalized letters.
(ie: "CLear SOmm" may be abbreviated to "CL SO")
Angle brackets (<>) signify required arguments.
Square brackets ([]) signify optional arguments.

'Boot'

- Boot the CPU from default device (DEFBOO.CMD)

'Boot <ddn>'

- If n is between 0-7, then the console deposits n to
R3 and executes the indirect file 'ddBOO.CMD'. If
only dd is supplied, n is assumed to be zero. If
three characters are supplied and n is not 0-7, then
the file 'dddBOO.CMD' is executed.

'CLear Step'

- Disable single-step mode.

'CLear SOmm'

- Clear Stop-On-Micro-Match enable.
Note: ID register 21 is the micro-match register.

'Continue'

- Issue a continue to the ISP.

D-1

'Deposit [/qualifier(s)] <address> <data>'
- Deposit <data> to <address>.
Qualifiers are:
Data length:
• /B •
'/W'
'/L'
'IQ'

= Byte ( 8 bi ts).
=Word (2 bytes).
=Longword (2 words).
=Quadword (4 words).

Address space:
'/CON' = Console (LSI-11) memory.
'/G'
=General registers 0 - F (RO - PC).

'/I I

'/ID'
'IP'
'/V'

'/VB'

= Internal (processor) registers.
= IDbus registers.
= Physical memory.
= Virtual memory.
= VBus registers.

Repeat count:
'/N:<number' =Next count. Repeat the examine
or deposit <number> times.
<address> may be a number, or one of the following:
' RO ' ,
'PSL'
'*'
'+'
'_,

Rl ' , ••• , ' Rl 1 I ,

AP I ,

FP I ,

SP' ,

PC I

(Last address)
(Next address)
(Preceding address)
'@'
(Use last exam/dep data as address)
<number> (String of digits in current default
radix, or prefixed by a radix operator:
(%0 for octal, %X for hex)).

D-2

'DIRectory'

- Print a directory of file on floppy in CSl:.

'ENable DXl:'

- Enable console software to access floppy drivel on
those systems with dual floppies.

'Examine [/qualifier(s)] <address>'
- Examine contents of <address>.
* See 'Deposit' for information on qualifiers and add
'Examine IR'

- Examine instruction reg (IR). Displays op-code,
specifier, execution point counter.

'Halt'

- Halt the ISP.

'HElp'

- Print this file (CONSOL.HLP).

'Initialize'

- Initialize the CPU.

'Link'

- Enter command linking mode (prompt becomes"<<<").
All commands typed by the user while linking are
stored in an indirect command file for later
execution. "'C ends linking.
(See also 'Perform'.)

'Load [/qualifier(s)] [filename]'
Load the specified file to main memory starting at
address 0. If the '/WCS' qualifier is not used, the
filename parameter is required.
Qualifiers are:
'/Start:<adrs>'
'/WCS'

'Next [number]'

'Perform'

Specifies the starting address.
Load to control store. (If this
qualifier is used, the default
filename is SSUnnn.WCS.)

- Execute <number> (default = 1) single-step cycles.
Type of step depends on last 'SET STEP' command.
- Execute a file of linked commands previously
generated via a 'Link' command.

'Qclear <address>'
- Quad clear <address>, which is forced to a quad word
boundary.
(Clears ECC errors.)

D-3

'REboot'

- Reload the console software.

'Repeat <command>'
- Repeatedly execute <command> until stopped by a AC.
'SEt Clock <speed>'
- Set CPU clock speed to Fast, Slow, or Normal.
'SEt Default <option[,option, ••• ]>
- Set console defaults:
CONsole, General, IDbus, Internal, Physical, VBus,
Virtual: Byte, Word, Long, Quad: Octal, Hex
'SEt Reloc:<num>'
- Put <num> into console relocation register.
Relocation register is added to effective address of
physical and virtual examines and deposits.
'SEt SOmm'

- Set Stop-On-Micro-Match enable. (Stop when UPC
equals the microaddress deposited into ID 21.)

'SEt Step instruction'
- Enter single instruction mode [SEt Step default].
'SEt Step State'
- Enter single time-state mode.
'SEt Terminal Fill:<number>'
- Set fill count for # of blanks written to the
terminal after <CR><LF>.
'SEt Terminal Program'
- Put console terminal into 'program I/0' mode.
'SHow'

- Show console and CPU state.

'SHow Version' - Show microcode and console version numbers.
'Start <{address} or {@}>'
- Initialize the CPU, deposit <address> to PC, and
issue a continue to the ISP. If the '@' is used, thE
contents of the last examined address is used as the
starting address.
'Test'

- Run micro-diagnostics.

'Test/Com'

- Load micro-diagnostics, wait for commands.

D-4

'Unjam'

- Unjam the SBI.

'WAit Done'

- When executed from an indirect command file, stop
command file execution until:
A) A 'done' signal is received from the program
running in the VAX (command file execution wil
continue), or
B)

The VAX-11/785 halts or operator Ac's.

•Ap•

- Put console terminal into 'console I/O' mode (unless
mode switch is set to 'disable').

'@<filename>'

- Process an indirect command file (<filename>.CMD).

D-5

APPENDIX E
ERROR HELP FILE

ERROR.HLP - VAX-11/785 Error Message Help File
Rev: 0.1, 10-0ct-1983
Copyright (c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation, Tewksbury,
Massachusetts
To abort printing, type Ac.
This file lists all the console error messages, indicating probable
cause and possible corrective procedures.
?'<text-string>' IS INCOMPLETE
The specified command requires additional parameters.
?'<text-string>' IS INCORRECT
The <text-string> is not recognized as a valid command.
?CAN'T DISABLE BOTH FLOPPIES, FUNCTION ABORTED
An attempt was made to disable both the remote and local floppy.
?CHM ERR
A change mode instruction was attempted from the interrupt stack.
?CPU CLK STOP, COMMAND ABORTED
A console command that requires the CPU clock to be running was
issued while the clock was stopped. (Clear step mode; re-issue
command.)
?CPU DBLE-ERR HLT
A machine check occurred before a previous machine check had been
handled, causing the CPU to execute a 'double error' halt.
(Examine ID registers 30-3F (hex); data indicates cause of machinE
check.)
?CPU NOT IN CONSOLE WAIT LOOP, COMMAND ABORTED
A console command requiring assistance from the CPU was issued
while CPU was not in the console service loop. (Halt CPU;
re-issue command.)
?FATAL ERROR: WCS NOT LOADED
The WCS-Load operation was aborted, either by AC or internal
error. (Reload WCS [use LOAD/WCS command or restart machine].)
?FILE NAME ERR
An illegal filename was used.

E-1

?FILE NOT FOUND
The 'LOAD' or '@' command could not find the specified file on thE
currently loaded floppy; the 'HELP' command could not find
CONSOL.HLP; the 'BOOT' command could not find ddBOO.CMD; the
'LOAD/WCS' command could not find SSUnnn.WCS or the specified WCS
file.
?FLOPPY ERR, CODE=n
The console floppy driver detected an error.
follows:
Code = 1
Code = 2
Code = 3
Code = 4

Codes are as

Floppy hardware error (CRC, parity, etc.)
File not found
Floppy driver queue overflow
Console software requested an illegal sector number

?FLOPPY ERROR ON BOOT
A floppy error was detected while attempting a console boot.
(Retry.)
?FLOPPY NOT READY
The console floppy drive failed to become ready when booting.
(Retry.)
?ILL I/E VEC
The CPU detected an illegal interrupt/exception vector.
?IND-COM ERR
The indirect command file contained a format error, such as:
- More than 80 characters in an indirect command line
- A command line did not end with a carriage return
INT PENDING
This warning indicates that an error was pending at the time that
a console-requested halt was performed. Continue CPU to clear
interrupt.
?INT-REG ERR
A micro-error occurred while attempting to reference a CPU
internal (processor) register. An illegal address will cause thi~
error.
?INT-STK INVLD
The CPU halted because the interrupt stack was marked invalid.

E-2

?MEM-MAN FAULT, CODE=nn
A virtual examine or deposit caused an error in the memory
management micro-routine. 'nn' is a one byte error code returned
by the routine, with the following bit assignments:
Bit 0 = Length violation
Bit 1 = Fault was on PTE reference
Bit 2 = Write or modify intent
Bit 3 = Access violation
Bits 4 through 7 should be ignored.
?MIC-ERR ON FUNCTION
A micro-error occurred in the CPU while serv1c1ng a console
request. SBI error registers are dumped after this message is
printed.
?MICRO-ERR, CODE=n
The micro-error code returned by the CPU is not in the range of
recognized error codes. 'n' is the code that was returned by the
CPU.
?MICRO-MACHINE TIME OUT
Indicates that the VAX-11/785 micromachine has failed to strobe
interrupts within the maximum time period allowed.
?NO BOOT ON FLOPPY
Console attempted to boot from a floppy that does not contain a
valid boot block. (Change floppy disk.)
?NO CPU RESPONSE
Console timed-out waiting for a response from the CPU. (Retry;
indicates possible CPU-related hardware fault.)
?Q-BLKD
Console's terminal output queue is blocked.
?TRAP-4, RESTARTING CONSOLE
The console took a time-out trap.

Console will restart.

?UNEXPECTED TRAP
MOUNT CONSOLE FLOPPY, THEN TYPE AC
Console trapped to an unused vector.
typed.

E-3

Console will reboot.

Console reboots when AC

?WARNING - WCS & PCS VER MISMATCH
The WCS file loaded from the floppy is not compatible with the PC~
ROMs on the JCS module. (Get correct WCS version and reload.)
?WCS LOAD CHECKSUM ERROR
Either the WCS file on the console floppy is corrupted (or is not
of standard checksum-encoded format) or the console had a
read-error while loading the file.
(Try reloading WCS; get a new
console floppy.)

E-4

APPENDIX F
REMOTE HELP FILE

REMOTE.HLP - VAX-11/785 Remote Diagnostics Help File
Rev: 0.1, 10-0ct-1983
Copyright (c) 1983, Digital Equipment Corporation, Tewksbury,
Massachusetts
To abort printing, type AC.
This file contains information on the Remote Diagnostics console
commands. (VAX-11/785 Remote Diagnostics option (RD785) is available
under separate license from Digital Equipment Corporation.)
'DISable Carrier Error' - Causes console to inhibit printing of
carrier lost message when loss of carrier
detected.
'DISable Echo'

Inhibits echo of characters typed in talk
mode.

'DISable Local Copy'

Disable local terminal from rece1v1ng copy
of output to remote terminal.

'DISable Local Floppy'

- (Affects protocol operation only) only the
remote floppy is searched when opening
files.

'DISable Remote Floppy' - On an attempt to open a file, only the
directory of the local floppy will be
searched. This command and 'DISable Local
Floppy' are mutually exclusive.
'ENable Carrier Error'

- Causes console to print '?CARRIER LOST' when
a loss of carrier is detected at remote
interface.

'ENable Echo'

- Causes characters typed in talk mode to be
echoed to the originating terminal.

'ENable Local COPy'

- Causes the local terminal to get a copy of
output being sent to remote terminal.

'ENable Local CONtrol'

- Allows local terminal to control system when
console switch is in remote position.
Disabled by a AP from the remote terminal.

F-1

'ENable Local Floppy'

- (Affects protocol operation only) on an
attempt to open a file, the directory of
local floppy will be searched first. If the
file is not found, the remote floppy's
directory is searched for file.

'ENable Remote Floppy'

- Allows the directory of the remote floppy to
be searched on an attempt to open a file.

'ENable Talk'

- Establish communication between local and
remote terminal. Keys entered at one
terminal are echoed on the other. AP exits
talk.

F-2

APPENDIX G

GLOSSARY

abort
An exception that occurs in the middle of an instruction that could leave the registers and memory in a
state. such that the instruction cannot be restarted.
absolute indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand is addressed in absolute mode.
absolute mode
~
In absolute mode addressing, the program counter (PC) is used as the register in autoincrement deferred mode. The PC contains the address of the actual operand.
absolute time
Time values expressing a specific date (month. day. and year) and time of day. Absolute time values
are always expressed in the system as positive numbers.
access mode
1.
Any of the four processor access modes in which software executes. Processor access modes are.
in order from most to least privileged and protected: kernel (mode 0). executive (mode 1),
supervisor (mode 2). and user (mode 3). When the processor is in kernel mode. the executing
software has complete control of, and responsibility for. the system. When the processor is in
any other mode. the processor is inhibited from executing privileged instructions. The processor
status longword contains the current access mode field. The operating system ~ses access modes
to define protection levels for software executing in the context of a process. ·For example. the
executive runs in kernel and executive mode and is most protected. The command interpreter is
less protected and runs in supervisor mode. The debugger runs in user mode and is not more
protected than normal user programs.

See record access mode.

access type
l.
The way in which the processor accesses instruction operands. Access types are: read. write.
modify, address. and branch.

......,

The way in which a procedure accesses its arguments .

acce5s violation
An attempt to reference an address that is not mapped into virtual memory or an attempt to reference
an address that is not accessible by the current access mode.
account name
A string that identifies a particular account used to accumulate data on a job's resource use. This name
is the user's accounting charge number, not the user's user identification code (UIC).

G-1

address
A number used by the operating system and user software to identify a storage location. See also
virtual address and physical address.
address access type
The specified operand of an instruction is not directly accessed by the instruction. The address of the
specified operand is the actual instruction operand. The context of the address calculation is given by
the data type of operand.
addressing mode
The way in which an operand is specified: for example, the way in which the effective address of an
instruction operand is calculated using the general registers. The basic general register addressing
modes are called: register, register deferred, autoincrement, autoincrement deferred, autodecrement,
displacement. and displacement deferred. In addition, there are six indexed addressing modes using
two general registers and literal mode addressing. The PC addressing modes are called: immediate (for
register deferred mode using the PC), absolute (for autoincrement deferred mode using the PC), and
branch.
address space
The set of all possible addresses available to a process. Virtual address space refers to the set of all
possible virtual addresses. Physical address space refers to the set of all possible physical addresses sent
out on the SBI.
allocate device
To reserve a particular device unit for exclusive use. A user process can allocate a device only when
that device is not allocated by any other process.
alphanumeric character
An upper or lower case letter (A-Z. a-z), a dollar sign($), an underscore(_), or a decimal digit (0.9).
American standard code for information interchange (ASCII)
A set of 8-bit binary numbers representing the alphabet. punctuation, numerals. and other special
symbols used in text representation and communications protocol.
;
ancillary control process ( ACP)
A process that acts as an interface between user software and an 1/0 driver. An ACP provides functions supplemental to those performed in the driver. such as file and directory management. Three
examples of ACPs are: the Files-11 ACP (Fl lACP), the magnetic tape ACP (MTACP). and the networks ACP (NET ACP).
argument pointer
General register 12 (Rl2). By convention, argument pointer contains the address of the base of the
argument list for procedures initiated using the CALL instructions.
assign a channel
To establish the necessary software linkage between a user process and a device unit before a user
process can transfer any data to or from that device. A user process requests the system to assign a
channel and the system returns a channel number.
asynchronous
A mode of activity that operates without respect to a clock. For example, asynchronous hardware uses
ready and done signals to schedule operations rather than time intervals. If two activities are asynchronous, the second can begin at a random interval with respect to the first.

G-2

asynchronous recQl'd operadon
A mode of record' processing in which a user program can continue to execute after issuing a record
retrieval or storage request without having to wait for the request to be fulfilled.
asynchronous system trap (AST)
A software-simulated interrupt to a user-defined service routine. ASTs enable a user process to be
notified asynchronously with respect to its execution of the occurrence of a specific event. If a user
process has defined an AST routine for an event, the system interrupts the process and executes the
AST routine when that event occurs. When the AST routine exits, the system resumes the process at
the point where it was interrupted.
asynchronous system trap leYel (ASTLVL)
A value kept in an internal processor register that is the highest access mode for which an AST is
pending. The AST does not occur until the current access mode drops in priority (raises in numeric
value) to a value greater than or equal to ASTL VL. Thus. an AST for an access mode will not be
serviced while the processor is executing in a higher priority access mode.
authorization file
See user authorization file.
autodecrement indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses autodecrement mode addressing.
autodecrement mode
In autodecrement mode addressing, the contents of the selected register are decremented and the result
is used as the address of the actual operand for the instruction. The contents of the register are decremented according to the data type context of the register: l for byte, 2 for word, 4 for longword and
floating, 8 for quadword and double floating.
autoincrement deferred indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses autoincrement deferred mode
addressing.
autoincrement deferred mode
In autoincrement deferred mode addressing, the specified register contains the address of a longword
that contains the address of the actual operand. The contents of the register are incremented by 4 (the
number of bytes in a longword). If the PC is used as the register, this mode is called absolute mode.
autoincrement indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses autoincrement mode addressing.
autoincrement mode
In autoincrement mode addressing, the contents of the specified register are used as the address of the
operand, then the contents of the register are incremented by the size of the operand.
balance set
The set of all process working sets currently resident in physical memory. The processes whose working sets are in the balance set have memory requirements that balance with available memory. The
balance set is maintained by the system swapper process.
base operand address
The address of the base of a table or array referenced by index mode addressing.

G-3

base operand specifier
The register used to calculate the base operand address of a table or array referenced by index mode
addressing.
·
base priority
The process priority that the system assigns a process when it is created. The scheduler never schedules
a process below its base priority. The base priority can be modified only by the system manager or the
process itself.
base register
A general register used to contain the address of the first entry in a list, table, array. or other data
structure.
binding
See linking.
bit string
See variable-length bit field.
block
1.
The smallest addressable unit of data that the specified device can transfer in an 1/0 operation
(512 contiguous bytes for most disk devices).
2.

An arbitrary number of contiguous bytes used to store logically related status. control, or other
processing information.

block 1/0
A data accessing technique in which the program manipulates the blocks (physical records) that make
up a file, instead of its logical records.
bootstrap block
A block in the index file on a system disk that contains a program that can load the operating system
·
·
into memory and start its execution.
branch access type
An instruction attribute which indicates that the processor does not reference an operand address. but
that the operand is a branch displacement. The size of the branch displacement is given by the data
type of the operand.
branch mode
In branch addressing mode, the instruction operand specifier is a signed byte or word displacement.
The displacement is added to the contents of the updated PC (which is the address of the first byte
beyond the displacement), and the result is the branch address.
bucket
A storage structure of I to 32 blocks that is used to store and transfer blocks of data in files with a
relative file organization.
bucket locking
A facility that prevents access to any record in a bucket by more than one user until that user releases
the bucket.
buffered 1/0
See system buffered 1/0.
G-4

bug check
The operating system's internal diagnostic check. When so indicated by the check the system logs the
failure and crashes the system.
byte
A byte is eight contiguous bits starting on an addressable byte boundary. Bits are numbered from the
right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. When interpreted arithmetically. a byte is a two's
complement integer with significance increasing from bits 0 through 6. Bit 7 is the sign bit. The value of
the signed integer is in the range -128 to 127 decimal. When interpreted as an unsigned integer, significance increases from bits 0 through 7 and the value of the unsigned integer is ill the range O to 255
decimal. A byte can be used to store one ASCII character.
cache memory
A small, high-speed memory placed between slower main memory and the processor. A cache increases effective memory transfer rates and processor speed. It contains copies of data recently used by
the processor. and fetches several bytes of data from memory in anticipation that the processor will
access the next sequential series of bytes.
call frame
See stack frame.
call instructions
The processor instructions CALLG (call procedure with general argument list) and CALLS (call procedure with stack argument list).
call stack
The stack. and conventional stack structure. used during a procedure call. Each access mode of each
process context has one call stack. and interrupt service context has one call stack.
channel
A logical path connecting a user process to a physical device unit. A user process requests the operating system to assign a channel to a device so the process can transfer data to or from that device.
character
A symbol represented by an ASCII code. See also alphanumeric character.
character string
A contiguous set of bytes. A character string is identified by two attributes: an address and a length. Its
address is the address of the byte containing the first character of the string. Subsequent characters are
stored in bytes of increasing addresses. The length is the number of characters in the string.
character string descriptor
A quadword data structure used for passing character data (strings). The first word of the quadword
contains the length of the character string. The second word can contain type information. The remaining longword contains the address of the string.
cluster
A set of contiguous blocks that is the basic unit of space allocation on a Files- I I disk volume.
I.
2.
A set of pages brought into memory in one paging operation.
3.
An event flag cluster.

G-5

command
An instruction, generally an English word. typed by the user at a terminal or included in a command
file that requests the software monitoring a terminal or reading a command file to perform some welldefined activity. For example. typing the COPY command requests the system to copy the contents of
one file into another file.
command file
A file containing command strings. See also command procedure.
command interpreter
Procedure-based system code that executes in supervisor mode in the context of a process to receive.
syntax check. and parse commands typed by the user at a terminal or submitted in a command file.
command parameter
The positional operand of a command delimited by spaces, such as a file specification, option, or
constant.
command procedure
A file containing commands and data that the command interpreter can accept in lieu of the user
typing the commands individually on a terminal.
command string
A line (or set of continued lines). normally terminated by typing the carriage return key, containing a
command and. optionally. information modifying the command. A complete command string consists
of a command. its qualifiers. if any. and its parameters (file specifications, for example), if any, and
their qualifiers. if any.
common
A FORTRAN term for a program section that contains only data.
common e~ent flag cluster
A set of 32 event flags that enables cooperating processes to post event notification to each other.
Common event flag clusters are created as they are needed. A process can associate with up to two
common event flag clusters.
··
compatibility mode
A mode of execution that enables the central processor to execute nonprivileged PDP- I I instructions.
The operating system supports compatibility mode execution by providing an RSX- I IM programming environment for an RSX-l l M task image. The operating system compatibility mode procedures
reside in the control region of the process executing a compatibility mode image. The procedures
intercept calls to the RSX- l l M executive and convert them to the appropriate operating system functions.
compiler
A program that translates a program written in a high-level language (such as FORTRAN or BASIC)
into an object program.
condition
An exception condition detected and declared by software. For example, see failure exception mode.
condition codes
Four bits in the processor status word that indicate the results of previously executed instructions.

G-6

condition handler
A procedure that is.:called upon by the system when an exception condition occurs. When an exception
condition occurs, the operating system searches for a condition handler and, if found, initiates the
condition handler immediately. The condition handler may perform some action to change the situation that caused the exception condition and continue execution for the process that incurred the
exception condition. Condition handlers execute in the context of the process at the access mode of the
code that incurred the exception condition.
condition value
A 32-bit quantity that uniquely identifies an exception condition.
context
The environment of an activity. See also process context, hardware context, and software context.
context indexing
The ability to index through a data structure automatically because the size of the data type is known
and used to determine the offset factor.
context switching
Interrupting the activity in progress and switching to another activity. Context switching occurs as a,ie
process after another is scheduled for execution. The operating system saves the hardware context of
the interrupted process in its hardware process control block (PCB) using the save process context
instruction. It also loads hardware PCB into the hardware context of another process using the load
process context instruction, scheduling that process for execution.
continuation character
A hyphen at the end of a command line signifying that the command string continues on to the next
command line.
console
The manual control unit integrated into the central processor. The console includes an LSI-I I microprocessor. a DXOI floppy disk, and a serial line interface connected to an LA36 terminal. It enables the
operator to start and stop the system, monitor system operation. and run diagnostics.
console terminal
The hard copy terminal (LA36) connected to the central processor console.
control region
The highest addressed half of virtual memory per-process space (the Pl region). Control region virtual
addresses refer to the process-related information used by the system to control the process. such as:
the kernel, executive, and supervisor stacks, the permanent 1/0 channels, exception vectors, and dynamically used system procedures (such as the command interpreter and RSX-11 M programming
environment compatibility mode procedures). The user stack is also normally found in the control
region, although it can .be located elsewhere.
control region base register ( Pl BR)
The processor register. or its equivalent in a hardware process control block, that contains the base
virtual address of a process control region page table.
control region length register (Pl LR)
The processor register. or its equivalent in a hardware process control block, that contains the number
of nonexistent page table entries for virtual pages in a process control region.

G-7

copy-on-reference
A method used in memory management for sharing data until a process accesses it. in which case it is
copied before the access. Copy-on-reference allows sharing of the initial values of a global section
whose pages have read/write access but contain pre-initialized data available to many processes.
counted string
A data structure consisting of a byte-sized length followed by the string. Although a counted string is
not used as a procedure argument. it is a convenient representation in memory.
current access mode
The processor access mode of the currently executing software. The current mode field of the processor
status longword indicates the access mode of the currently executing software.
cylinder
The tracks at the same radius on all recording surfaces of a disk.
data base
I.
All the occurrences of data described by a data base management system.
2.
A collection of related data structures.
data structure
Any table. list. array. queue. or tree whose format and access conventions are well-defined for reference by one or more images.
data type
In general. the way in which bits are grouped and interpreted. In reference to the processor instructions. the data type of an operand identifies the size of the operand and the significance of the bits in
the operand. Operand data types include: byte, word. longword. and quadword integer. floating and
double floating, character string. packed decimal string, and variable-length bit field.
deferred echo
Refers to the fact that terminal echoing does not occur until a process is ready to accept input entered
by type ahead.
delta time
A time value expressing an offset from the current date and time. Delta times are always expressed in
the system as negative numbers whose absolute value is used as an offset from the current time.
demand zero page
A page, typically of an image stack or buffer area. that is initialized to contain all zeros when dynamically created in memory as a result of a page fault. This feature eliminates the waste of disk space that
would otherwise be required to store blocks (pages) that contain only zeros.
descriptor
A data structure used in calling sequences for passing argument types. addresses. and other optional
infQrmation. See character string descriptor.
detached process
A process that has no owner. The parent process of a tree of subprocesses. Detached processes are
created by the job controller when a user logs on the system or when a batch job is initiated. The job
controller does not own the user processes it creates; these processes therefore are detached.

G-8

deYice
The general namdor any physical terminus or link connected to the processor that is capable of
receiving, storing, or transmitting data. Card readers, line printers. and terminals are examples of
record-oriented devices. Magnetic tape devices and disk devices are examples of mass storage devices.
Terminal line interfaces and interprocessor links are examples of communications devices.
device interrupt
An interrupt received on interrupt priority level 16 through 23. Device interrupts can be requested only
by devices, controllers, and memories.
device name
The field in a file specification that identifies the device unit on which a file is stored. Device names
also include the mnemonics that identify an 1/0 peripheral device in a data transfer request. A device
name consists of a mnemonic followed by a controller identification letter (if applicable), followed by a
unit number (if applicable). A colon (:) separates it from following fields.
device queue
See spool queue.
device register
'i
A location in device controller log used to request device functions (such as 1/0 transfers) and/or
report status.
device unit
One drive, and its controlling logic, of a mass storage device system. A mass storage system can have
several drives connected to it.
diagnostic
A program that tests logic and reports any faults it detects.
direct 1/0
An 1/0 operation in which the system locks the pages containing the associated buffer in memory for
the duration of the 1/0 operation. The 1/0 transfer takes place directly from the process buffer.
Contrasts with system buffered 1/0.
direct mapping cache
A cache organization in which only one address comparison is needed to locate any data in the cache
because any block of main memory data can be placed in only one possible position in the cache.
Contrasts with fully associative cache.
directory
A file used to locate files on a volume that contains a list of file names (including type and version
number) and their unique internal identifications.
tlirectory name
The field in a file specification that identifies the directory file in which a file is listed. The directory
name begins with a left bracket ([or <)and ends with a right bracket(] or >).
displacement deferred indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses displacement deferred mode
addressing.

G-9

displacement deferrtd mode
In displacement deferred mode addressing, the specifier extension is a byte. word. or longword displacement. The displacement is sign extended to 32 bits and added to a base address obtained from the
specified register. The result is the address of a longword that contains the address of the actual
operand. If the PC is used as the register, the updated contents of the PC are used as the base address.
The base address is the address of the first byte beyond the specifier extension.
displacement indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses displacement mode addressing.
displacement mode
In displacement mode addressing, the specifier extension is a byte. word, or longword displacement.
The displacement is sign extended to 32 bits and added to a base address obtained from the specified
register. The result is the address of the actual operand. If the PC is used as the register, the updated
contents of the PC are used as the base address. The base address is the address of the first byte beyond
the specifier extension.
double floating datum
Eight contiguous bytes (64 bits), starting on an addressable byte boundary, which are interpreted as
containing a floating point number. The bits are labeled from right to left, 0 to 63. A four-word
floating-point number is identified by the address of the byte containing bit 0. Bit 15 contains the sign
of the number. Bits 14 through 7 contain the excess 128 binary exponent. Bits 63 through 16 and 6
through 0 contain a normalized 56-bit fraction with the redundant most significant fraction bit not
represented. Within the fraction, bits of decreasing significance go from 6 through 0, 31 through 16, 47
through 32. then 63 through 48. Exponent values of 1 through 255 in the 8-bit exponent field represent
true binary exponents of -128 to 127. An exponent value of O. together with a sign bit of 0, represent a
floating value of 0. An exponent value of 0 with a sign bit of l is a reserved representation: floatingpoint instructions processing this value return a reserved operand fault. The value of a floating datum
is in the approximate range ( + or - ) 0.29 X Hr38 to I. 7 X 1Q38. The precision is approximately one
part in 2ss or sixteen decimal digits.
dri~e

The electromechanical unit of a mass storage device system on which a recording m,edium (disk car·
tridge. disk pack. or magnetic tape reel) is mounted.
dri~er

The set of code that handles physical 1/0 to a device.

dynamic access
A technique in which a program switches from one record access mode to another while processing a
file.
echo
A terminal handling characteristic in which the characters typed by the terminal user on the keyboard
are also displayed on the screen or printer.
effective address
The address obtained after indirect or indexing modifications are calculated.
entry mask
A word whose bits represent the registers to be saved or restored on a subroutine or procedure call
using the call and return instructions.

G-10

entry point
A location that can be specified as the object of a call. It contains an entry mask and exception enables
known as the entry point mask.
equi•alence name
The string associated with a logical name in a logical name table. An equivalence name can be. for
example, a device name, another logical name, or a logical name concatenated with a portion of a file
specification.
error logier
A system process that empties the error log buffers and writes the error messages into the error file.
Errors logged by the system include memory system errors, device errors and timeouts. and interrupts
with invalid vector addresses.
escape sequence
An escape is a transition from the normal mode of operation to a mode outside the normal mode. An
escape character is the code that indicates the transition from normal to escape mode. An escape
sequence refers to the set of character combinations starting with an escape character that the terminal
transmits without interpretation to the software set up to handle escape sequences.
e•ent
A change in process status or an indication of the occurrence of some activity that concerns an individual process or cooperating processes. An incident reported to the scheduler that affects the ability of a
process to execute. Events can be synchronous with the process's execution (a wait request), or they
can be asynchronous (1/0 completion). Some other events include: swapping, wake request, page
fault.
e•ent flag
A bit in an event flag cluster that can be set or cleared to indicate the occurrence of the event associated
with that flag. Event flags are used to synchronize activities in a process or among many processes.
e•ent flag cluster
A set of 32 event flags that are used for event posting. Four clusters are defined for each process: two
process-local clusters. and two common event flag clusters. Of the process-local flags. eight are re
served for system use.
·
exception
An event detected by the hardware (other than an interrupt or jump, branch, case. or call instruction)
that changes the normal flow of instruction execution. An exception is always caused by the execution
of an instruction or set of instructions (whereas an interrupt is caused by an activity in the system
independent of the current instruction). There are three types of hardware exceptions: traps, faults.
and aborts. Examples are: attempts to execute a privileged or reserved instruction. trace traps, compatibility mode faults, breakpoint instruction execution, and arithmetic traps such as overflow. underflow, and divide by zero.
exception condition
A hardware- or software-detected event other than an interrupt or jump. branch, case. or call instructiofi that changes the normal flow of instruction execution.
exception dispatcher
An operating system procedure that searches for a condition handler when an exception condition
occurs. If no exception handler is found for the exception or condition, the image that incurred the
exception is terminated.

G-11

exception enables
See trap enables.
exception vector
See vector.
executable image
An image that is capable of being run in a process. When run. an executable image is read from a file
for execution in a process.
executive
The generic name for the collection of procedures included in the operating system software that
provides the basic control and monitoring functions of the operating system.
executive mode
The second most privileged processor access mode (mode I). The record management services (RMS)
and many of the operating system's programmed service procedures execute in executive mode.
exit
An image exit is a rundown activity that occurs when image execution terminates either normally or
abnormally. Image rundown activities include deassigning 1/0 channels and disassociation of common event flag clusters. Any user-or-system-specified exit handlers are called.
exit handler
A procedure executed when an image exits. An exit handler enables a procedure that is not on the call
stack to gain control and clean up procedure-own data bases before the actual image exit occurs.
extended attribute block (XAB)
A record management service user data structure that contains additional file attributes beyond those
expressed in the file access block (FAB), such as boundary types (aligned on cylinder. logical block
number, virtual block number) and file protection information.
extension
The amount of space to allocate at the end of a file each time a sequential write exceeds the allocated
length of the file.
extent
The contiguous area on a disk containing a file or a portion of a file. Consists of one or more clusters.
failure exception mode
A mode of execution selected by a process indicating that it wants an exception condition declared if
an error occurs as the result of a system service call. The normal mode is for the system service to
return an error status code for which the process must test.
fault
A hardware exception condition that occurs in the middle of an instruction and leaves the registers and
memory in a consistent state, such that elimination of the fault and restarting the instruction will give
correct results.
field
l.
2.

See variable-length bit field.
A set of contiguous bytes in a logical record.

,..

...

file access block ( FAB)
A record management service user data structure that represents a request for data operations related
to the file as a whole, such as OPEN. CLOSE, or CREA TE.
file header
A block in the index file describing a file on a Files-I I disk structure. The file header identifies the
locations of the file's extents. There is a file header for every file on the disk.
file name
The field preceding a file type in a file specification that contains a 1- to 9-character logical name for a
file.
file name extension
See file type.
file organization
The particular file structure used to record the data comprising a file on a mass storage medium.
Record management services (RMS) file organizations are: sequential, relative, direct, and indexed.

Files-11
The name of the on-disk structure used by the RSX-I I, IAS and VAX operating systems. Volumes
created under this structure are transportable between these operating systems.
file specification
A unique name for a file on a mass storage medium. It identifies the node, the device, the directory
name, the file name. the file type, and the version number under which a file is stored.
file structure
The way in which the blocks forming a file are distributed on a disk or magnetic tape to provide a
physical accessing technique suitable for the way in which the data in the file is processed.
file system
A method of recording, cataloging, and accessing files on a volume.
file type
The field in a file specification that is preceded by a period or a dot(.) and consists of a zero- to threecharacter type identification. By convention, the type identifies a generic class of files that have the
same use or characteristics, such as ASCII text files, binary object files, etc.
fixed control area
An area associated with a variable length record available for controlling or assisting record access
operations. Typical uses include line numbers and printer format control information.
fixed length record format
A file format in which all records have the same length.
floating (point) datum
Four contiguous bytes (32 bits) starting on an addressable byte boundary. The bits are labeled from
right to left from 0 to 31. A two-word floating-point number is identified by the address of the byte
containing bit 0. Bit 15 contains the sign of the number. Bits 14 through 7 contain the excess 128 binary
exponent. Bits 31 through 16 and 6 through 0 contain a normalized 24-bit fraction with the redundant
most significant fraction bit not represented. Within the fraction, bits of decreasing significance go
from bit 6 through 0, then 31 through 16. Exponent values of 1 through 255 in the 8-bit exponent field

G-13

represent true binary~exponents of -128 to 127. An exponent value of 0, together with a sign bit of O.
represent a floating value ofO. An exponent value ofO, with a sign bit of l, is a reserved representation:
floating-point instructions-processing this value return a reserved operand fault. The value of a floating datum is in the approximate range(+ or-) 0.29 X 1<:r38 to l.7 X 1Q38. The precision is approximately one part in 223 or seven decimal digits.
foreign volume
Any volume other than a Files-1 l formatted volume that may or may not be file structured.
fork process
A dynamically created system process such as a process that executes device driver code or the timer
process. Fork processes have minimal context. Fork processes are scheduled by the hardware rather
than by the software. The timer process is dispatched directly by software interrupt. 1/0 driver processes are dispatched by a fork dispatcher. Fork processes execute at software interrupt levels and are
dispatched for execution immediately. Fork processes remain resident until they terminate.
frame pointer
General register 13 (Rl3). By convention, the frame pointer (FP) contains the base address of the most
recent call frame on the stack.
fully associative cache

A cache organization in which any block of data from main memory can be placed anywhere in the
cache. Address comparison must take place against each block in the cache to find any particular
block. Contrasts with direct mapping cache.
general register
Any of the six.teen 32-bit registers used as the primary operands of the native mode instructions. The
general registers include 12 general purpose registers that can be used as accumulators. as counters.
and as pointers to locations in main memory, and the frame pointer (FP). argument pointer (AP),
stack pointer (SP), and program counter (PC) registers.
generic device name
A device name that identifies the type of device but not a particular unit: a device name in which the
specific controller and/or unit number is omitted.
giga
Metric term used to represent the number 1 followed by nine zeros. Equivalent to billions.
global page table
The page table containing the master page table entries for global sections.
global section
A data structure (e.g., FORTRAN global common) or sharable image section potentially available to
all processes in the system. Access is protected by privilege and/ or group number of the user identification code (UIC).
global symbol
A symbol defined in a module that is potentially available for reference by another module. The linker
resolves (matches references with definitions) global symbols. Contrasts with local symbol.
global symbol table ( GST)
In a library. an index of defined global symbols used to access the modules defining the global symbols. The linker will also put global symbol tables into an image. For ex.ample, the linker appends a
global symbol table to executable images that are intended to run under the symbolic debugger, and it
appends a global symbol table to all sharable images.
G-14

group
I.
A set of users who have special access privileges to each other's directories and files within those
directories (unless protected otherwise), as in the context "system, owner. group, world," where
group refers to a.II members of a particular owner's group.
2.

A set of jobs (processes and their subprocesses) that have access privileges to a group's common
event flags and logical name tables, and may have mutual process controlling privileges, such as
scheduling, hibernation, etc.

group number
The first number in a user identification code (UIC).
hardware context
The values contained in the following registers while a process is executing: the program counter (PC);
the processor status longword (PSL); the 14 general registers (RO through Rl3): the four processor
registers ( POBR, POLR, Pl BR, and Pl LR) that describe the process virtual address space: the stack
pointer (SP) for the current access mode in which the processor is executing; plus the contents to be
loaded in the stack pointer for every access mode other than the current access mode. While a process
is executing, its hardware context is continually being updated by the processor. While a process is not
executing, its hardware context is stored in its hardwar~ process control block (PCB).
hardware process control block (PCB)
A data structure known to the processor that contains the hardware context when a process is not
executing. A process's hardware PCB resides in its process header.
hibernation
A state in which a process is inactive, but known to the system with all of its current status. A hibernating process becomes active again when a wake request is issued. It can schedule a wake request before
hibernating, or another process can issue its wake request. A hibernating process also becomes active
for the time sufficient to service any asynchronous system trap (AST) it may receive while it is hibernating. Contrasts with suspension.
home block
A block in the index

file that contains the volume identification. such as volume label and protection.

image
An image consists of procedures and data that have been bound together by the linker. There are three
types of images: executable, sharable, and system.
image activator
A set of system procedures that prepares an image for execution. The image activator establishes the
memory management data structures required both to map the image's virtual pages to physical pages
and to perform paging.
image exit
See exit.
image 1/0 segment
That portion of the control region that contains the record management services (RMS) internal file
access blocks (If AB) and 1/0 buffers for the image currently being executed by a process.
image name
The file name of the file in which an image is stored.

G-15

image privileges
The privileges assigned to an image when it is linked. See process privileges.
image section (isect)
A group of program sections (psects) with the same attributes (such as read-only access. read/write
access, absolute, relocatable, etc.) that is the unit of virtual memory allocation for an image.
immediate mode
ln immediate mode addressing, the program counter (PC) is used as the registw in autoincrement
mode addressing.
indexed addressing mode
ln indexed mode addressing, two registers are used to determine the actual instruction operand: an
index register and a base operand specifier. The contents of the index register are used as an index
(offset) into a table or array. The base operand specifier supplies the base address of the array (the base
operand address or BOA). The address of the actual operand is calculated by multiplying the contents
of the index register by the size (in bytes) of the actual operand and adding the result to the base
operand address. The addressing modes resulting from index mode addressing are formed by adding
the suffix "indexed" to the addressing mode of the base operand specifier: register deferred indexc.d,
autoincrement indexed. autoincrement deferred indexed (or absolute indexed), autodecrement indexed. displacement indexed. and displacement deferred indexed.
indexed file organization
A file organization in which a file contains records and a primary key index (and optionally one Oi
more alternate key indices) used to process the records sequentially by index or randomly by index.
index file
The file on a Files-I I volume that contains the access information for all files on the volume and
enables the operating system to identify and access the volume.
index tile bit map
A table in the index file of a Files- I I volume that indicates which file headers are in use.
index register
A register used to contain an address offset.
indirect command file
See command procedure.
input stream
The source of commands and data, i.e., the user's terminal. the batch stream, or an indirect command
file.
instruction buffer
An 8-byte buffer in the processor used to contain bytes of the instruction currently being decoded and
to pre-fetch instructions in the instruction stream. The control logic continuously fetches data from
memory to keep the 8-byte buffer full.
interleaving
Assigning consecutive physical memory addresses alternately between two memory controllers.
interprocess communication facility
A common event flag, mailbox, or global section used to pass information between two or more
processes.

G-16

interrecord gap
A blank space delioerately placed between data records on the recording surface of a magnetic tape.
interrupt
An event other than an exception or branch. jump. case, or call instruction that changes the normal
flow of instruction execution. Interrupts are generally external to the process executing when the
interrupt occurs. See also device interrupt. software interrupt. and urgent interrupt.
interrupt priority level (I PL)
The interrupt level at which the processor executes when an interrupt is generatJ:d. There are 31 possible interrupt priority levels. IPL I is lowest. 31 highest. The levels arbitrate contention for processor
service. For example. a device cannot interrupt the processor if the processor is currently executing at
an interrupt priority level greater than the interrupt priority level of the device's interrupt service
routine.
interrupt service routine
The routine executed when a device interrupt occurs.
interrupt stack
The system-wide stack used when executing in interrupt service context. At any time. the processQr is
either in a process context executing in user. supervisor, executive. or kernel mode; or in system-wide
interrupt service context operating with kernel privileges, as indicated by the interrupt stack and current mode bits in the PSL. The interrupt stack is not context switched.
interrupt stack pointer
The stack pointer for the interrupt stack. Unlike the stack pointers for process context stacks, which
are stored in the hardware PCB. the interrupt stack pointer is stored in an internal register.
interrupt vector
See vector.
1/0 driver
See driver.
I I 0 function
An 1/0 operation that is interpreted by the operating system and typically results in one or more
physical 1/0 operations.
1/0 function code
A 6-bit value specified in a queue I/O request system service that describes the particular 1/0 operation to be performed (e.g., read, write. rewind).
1/0 function modifier
A 10-bit value specified in a queue 1/0 request system service that modifies an 1/0 function code (e.g ..
read terminal input no echo).
1/0 lockdown
The state of a page such that it cannot be paged or swapped out of memory until any 1/0 in progress to
that page is completed.
1/0 rundown
An operating system function in which the system cleans up any 1/0 in progress when an image exits.

G-17

1/0 space
The region of physical address space that contains the configuration registers, and device control/status and data registers.
1/0 status block
A data structure associated with the queue 1/0 request system service. This service optionally returns a
status code, number of bytes transferred, and device- and function-dependent information in an 1/0
status block. It is not returned from the service call. but filled in when the 1/0 request completes.
job

A job is the accounting unit equivalent to a process and the collection of all the subprocesses, if
any, that it and its subprocesses create. Jobs are classified as batch and interactive. For example, the job controller creates an interactive job to handle a user's requests when the user
logs onto the system and it creates a batch job when the symbiont manager passes a command
input file to it.

A print job.

job controller
The system process that establishes a job's process context, starts a process running the LOGIN image
for the job, maintains the accounting record for the job, manages symbionts, and terminates a process
and its subprocesses.
job queue

A list of files that a process has supplied for processing by a specific device, for example, a line printer.
kernel mode
The most privileged processor access mode (mode 0). The operating system's most privileged services,
such as 1/0 drivers and the pager, run in kernel mode.
librarian
A program that allows the user to create, update. modify, list, and maintain object library, image
library, and assembler macro library files.
·
library file
A direct access file containing one or more modules of the same module type.
limit
The size or number of given items requiring system resources (such as mailboxes, locked pages, 1/0
requests, open files, etc.) that a job is allowed to have at any one time during execution, as specified by
the system manager in the user authorization file. See also quota.
line number
A number used to identify a line of text in a file processed by a text editor.
linker
A program that reads one or more object files created by language processors and produces an executable image file, a sharable image file, or a system image file.
linking
The resolution of external references between object modules used to create an image, the acquisition
of referenced library routines, service entry points, and data for the image, and the assignment of
virtual addresses to components of an image.

G-IR

literal mode
In literal mode addressing, the instruction operand is a constant whose value is expressed in a 6-bit
field of the instruction. If the operand data type is byte, word, longword, or quadword, the operand is
zero-extended and can express values in the range 0 through 63 (decimal). If the operand data type is
floating or double floating, the 6-bit field is composed of two 3-bit fields, one for the exponent and the
other for the fraction. The operand is extended to floating or double floating format.
locality
See program locality.
local symbol
A symbol meaningful only to the module that defines it. Symbols not identified to a language processor as global symbols are considered to be local symbols. A language processor resolves (matches
references with definitions) local symbols. They arc not known to the linker and cannot be made
available to another object module. They can, however, be passed through the linker to the symbolic
debuffcr. Contrasts with global symbol.
locate mode
A record access technique in which a program reads records in a record management service (RMS)
block buffer working storage area to reduce overhead. Sec also move mode.
locking a page in memory
Making a page in an image ineligible for either paging or swapping. A page stays locked in memory
until it is specifically unlocked.
locking a page in the working set
Making a page in an image ineligible for paging out of the working set for the image. The page can be
swapped when the process is swapped. A page stays locked in a working set until it is specifically
unlocked.
logical block number
A number used to identify a byte on a mass storage device. The number is a volume-relative address
rather than a physical (device-oriented) address or a virtual (file-relative) address. The blocks that
comprise the volume arc labeled sequentially with logical block number 0. ·.
logical 1/0 function
A set of 1/0 operations (e.g., read and write logical block) that allow restricted direct access to device
level 1/0 operations using logical block addresses.
logical name
A user-specified name for any portion or all of a file specification. For example, the logical name
INPUT can be assigned to a terminal device from which a program reads data entered by a user.
Logical name assignments arc maintained in logical name tables for each process, each group. and the
system. A logical name can be created and assigned a value permanently or dynamically.
logical name table
A table that contains a set of logical names and their equivalent names for a particular process, a
particular group, or the system.
longword
.
Four contiguous bytes (32 bits) starting on an addressable byte boundary. Bits are numbered from
right to left with 0 through 31. The address of the longword is the address of the byte containing bit 0.
When interpreted arithmetically, a longword is a two's complement integer with significance incrcas-

G-19

ing from bit 0 to brt 30. When interpreted as a signed integer, bit 31 is the sign bit. The value of the
signed integer is in the range-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483.647. When interpreted as an unsigned integer,
significance increases from bit 0 to bit 31. The value of the unsigned integer is in the range 0 through
4,294,967,295.
macro
A statement that requests a language processor to generate a predefined set of instructions.
mailbox
A software data structure that is treated as a record-oriented device for general interprocess commu-

nication. Communication using a mailbox is similar to other forms of device-independent 1/0. Senders perform a write to a mailbox, the receiver performs a read from that mailbox. Some system-wide
mailboxes are defined: the error logger and OPCOM read from system-wide mailboxes.
main memory
See physical memory.
mapping window
A subset of the retrieval information for a file that is used to translate virtual block numbers to logtcal
block numbers.
mass storage device
A device capable of reading and writing data on mass storage such as a disk pack or a magnetic tape

reel.
member number
The second number in a user identification code that uniquely identifies that code.
memory management
The system functions that include the hardware's page mapping and protection and the operating
system's image activator and pager.
memory mapping enable (MME)
A bit in a processor register that governs address translation.
modify access type
The specified operand of an instruction or procedure is read, and is potentially modified and written.
during that instruction's or procedure's execution.
module
I.
A portion of a program or program library, as in a source module. object module, or image
module.

A board, usually made of plastic covered with an electrical conductor, on which logic devices
(such as transistors, resistors, and memory chips) are mounted, and circuits connecting these
devices are etched, as in a logic module.

monitor console routine ( MCR)
The command interpreter in an RSX-11 system.
mount a volume
.
1.
To logically associate a volume with the physical unit on which it is loaded (an activity accomplished by system software at the request of an operator).

G-20

To load or pjace a magnetic tape or disk pack on a drive ~nd place the drive on-line (an activity
accomplished by a system operator).

move mode
A record l/E access technique in which a program accesses records in its own working storage area.
See also locate mode.
mutex
A flag that is used to control exclusive access to a region of code that can share a data structure or
other resource. The mutex (mutual exclusion) flag ensures that only one process a.ta time has access to
the region of code.
name block (NAM)
An RMS user data structure that contains supplementary information used in parsing file specifications.
native image
An image whose instructions are executed in native mode.
native mode
The processor's primary execution mode in which the programmed instructions are interpreted as
byte-aligned, variable-length instructions that operate on byte, word, longword, and quadword integer. floating and double floating, character string, packed decimal, and variable-length bit field data.
The instruction execution mode other than compatibility mode.
network
A collection of interconnected individual computer systems.
nibble
The low-order or high-order four bits of a byte.
node
An individual computer system in a network.
null process
A small system process that is the lowest priority process in the system and takes one entire priority
class. One function of the null process is to accumulate idle processor time.
numeric string
A contiguous sequence of bytes representing up to 31 decimal digits (one per byte) and possibly a sign.
The numeric string is specified by its lowest addressed location, its length, and its sign representation.
object module
The binary output of a language processor such as the assembler or a compiler, which is used as input
to the linker.
object time system ( OTS)
See run time procedure library.
offset
A fixed displacement from the beginning of a data structure. System offsets for items within a data
structure normally have an associated symbolic name used instead of the numeric displacement.
Where symbols are defined, programmers always reference the symbolic names for items in a data
structure instead of using the numeric displacement.
G-21

op code
The pattern of bits within an instruction that specifies the operation to be performed.
operand specifier
The pattern of bits in an instruction that indicates the addressing mode, a register and/or displacement, which, taken together, identify an instruction operand.
operand specifier type
The access type and data type of an instruction's operand(s). For example, the test instructions are of
read access type, since they only read the value of the operand. The operand can be of byte. word, or
longword data type, depending on whether the op code is for the TSTB (test byte), TSTW (test word),
or TSTL (test longword) instruction.
operator communication mana1er (OPCOM)
A system process that is always active. OPCOM receives input from a process that wants to inform an
operator of a particular status or condition, passes a message to the operator. and tracks the message.
operator's console
Any terminal identified as a terminal attended by a system operator.
owner
In the context "system, owner, group, world," an owner is the particular member (or a group) to which
a file, global section, mailbox, or event flag cluster belongs.
owner process
The process (with the exception of the job controller) or subprocess that created a subprocess.
packed decimal
A method of representing a decimal number by storing a pair of decimal digits in one byte, taking
advantage of the fact that only four bits are required to represent the numbers zero through nine.
packed decimal string
.
A contiguous sequence of up to 16 bytes interpreted as a string of nibbles. Each nibble represents a
digit except the low-order nibble of the highest addressed byte. which represents the sign. The packed
decimal string is specified by its lowest addressed location and the number of digits.
page
l.
A set of 512 contiguous byte locations used as the unit of memory mapping and protection.
2.

The data between the beginning of file and a page marker, between two markers, or between a
marker and the end of a file.

page fault
An exception generated by a reference to a page which is not mapped into a working set.
page fault cluster size
The number of pages read in on a page fault.
page frame number (PFN)
The address of the first byte of a page in physical memory. The high-order 21 bits of the physical
address of the base of a page.

page marker
A character or characters (generally a form feed) that separates pages in a file that is processed by a
text editor.
pager
A set of kernel mode procedures that executes as the result of a page fault. The pager makes the page
for which the fault occurred available in physical memory so that the image can continue execution.
The pager and the image activator provide the operating system's memory management functions.
page table entry (PTE)
The data structure that identifies the location and status of a page of virtual address space. When a
virtual page is in memory, the PTE contains the page frame number needed to map t,he virtual page to
a physical page. When it is not in memory, the PTE contains the information needed to locate the page
on secondary storage (disk).
paging
The action of bringing pages of an executing process into physical memory when referenced. When the
process executes, all of its pages are said to reside in virtual memory. Only the actively used pages,
however. need to reside in physical memory. The remaining pages can reside on disk until they are
needed in physical memory. In this system, a process is paged only when it references more pages than
it is allowed to have in its working set. When the process refers to a page not in its working set, a pqe
fault occurs. This causes the operating system's pager to read in the referenced page if it is on disk
(and, optionally, other related pages depending on a cluster factor), replacing the least recently faulted
pages as needed. A process pages only against itself.
parameter
See command parameter.
per-process address space
See process address space.
physical address
The address used by hardware to identify a location in physical memory on directly addressable secondary storage devices such as a disk. A physical memory address consists of a page frame number and
the number of a byte within the page. A physical disk block address consists of cylin9er or track and
·
sector number.

physical address space
The set of all possible 30-bit physical addresses that can be used to refer to locations in memory
(memory space) or device registers (1/0 space).
physical block
A block on a mass storage device referred to by its physical (device-oriented) address rather than a
logical (volume-relative) or virtual (file-relative) address.
physical 1/0 functions
A set of 1/0 functions that allow access to all device level 1/0 operations except maintenance mode.
physical memory
The memory modules connected to the SBI that are used to store:
1.
2.

instructions that the processor can directly fetch and execute, and
any other data that a processor is instructed to manipulate.

Also called main memory.
G-23

position dependent eode
Code that can execute properly only in the locations in virtual address space that are assigned to it by
the linker.
position independent code
Code that can execute properly without modification wherever it is located in virtual address space,
even if its location is changed after it has been linked. Generally, this code uses addressing modes that
form an effective address relative to the program counter (PC).
primary •ector
A location that contains the starting address of a condition handler to be executed when an exception
condition occurs. If a primary vector is declared, that condition handler is the first handler to be
executed.
private section
An image section of a process that is not sharable among processes. See also global section.
pri•ilege
See process privilege, user privilege, and image privilege.
prMleged instructions
In general, any instructions intended for use by the operating system or privileged system programs. In
particular, instructions that the processor will not execute unless the current access mode is kernel
mode (e.g., HALT, SVPCTX, LDPCTX, MTPR, and MFPR).
procedure
I.
A routine entered via a call instruction.
2.
See command procedure.
process
The basic entity scheduled by the system software that provides the context in which an image executes. A process consists of an address space and both hardware and software context.
process address space
See process space.
process context
The hardware and software contexts of a process.
process control block (PCB)
A data structure used to contain process context. The hardware PCB contains the hardware context.
The software PCB contains the software context, which includes a pointer to the hardware PCB.
process header
A data structure that contains the hardware process control block (PCB), accounting and quota information, process section table, working set list, and the page tables defining the virtual layout of the
process.
process header slots
That portion of the system address space in which the system stores the process headers for the processes in the balance set. The number of process header slots in the system determines the number of
processes that can be in the balance set at any one time.

G-24

process identification ( PIO)
The operating system's unique 32-bit binary value assigned to a process.
process 1/0 segment
That portion of a process control region that contains the process permanent record management
service (RMS) internal file access block for each open file. and the 1/0 buffers, including the command
interpreter's command buffer and command descriptors.
process name
A I- to 15-character ASCII string that can be used to identify processes executing under the same
group number.
processor re1ister
A part of the processor used by the operating system software to control the execution states of the
computer system. They include the system base and length registers, the program and control region
base and length registers, the system control block base register, the software interrupt request register,
and many more.
processor status lonpord (PSL)
A system-programmed processor register consisting of a word of privileged processor status and the
PSW. The privileged processor status information includes: the current interrupt priority level (IPl),
the previous access mode, the current access mode, the interrupt stack bit, the trace trap pending bit,
and the compatibility mode bit.
processor status word ( PSW)
The low-order word of the processor status longword. Processor status information includes: the condition codes (carry, overflow, zero, negative), the arithmetic trap enable bits (integer overflow, decimal
overflow, floating underflow), and the trace enable bit.
process page tables
The page tables used to describe process virtual memory.
process priority
The priority assigned to a process for scheduling purposes. The operating system recognizes 32 levels
of process priority, where 0 is low and 31 high. Levels 16 through 31 are used forJime-critical processes. The system does not modify the priority of a time-critical process (although tne system manager
or process itself may). Levels 0 through 15 are used for normal processes. The system may temporarily
increase the priority of a normal process based on the activity of the process.
process privileges
The privileges granted to a process by the system. which are a combination of user privileges and image
privileges. They include, for example, the privilege to: affect other processes associated with the same
group as the user's group, affect any process in the system regardless of user identification code (UIC),
set process swap mode, create permanent event flag clusters, create another process, create a mailbox,
and perform direct 1/0 to a file-structured device.
process section
See private section.
process space
The lowest-addressed half of virtual address space, where per process instructions and data reside.
Process space is divided into a program region and a control region.

G-25

program counter ( ~)
. .
.
. ,
.
.
General register 1S (R 15). At the begmmng of an mstruct1on s execution, the PC normally contains the
address of a location in memory from which the processor will fetch the next instruction it will execute.
program locality
A characteristic of a program that indicates how close or far apart the references to locations in virtual
memory are over time. A program with a high degree of locality does not refer to many widely scattered virtual addresses in a short period of time.
programmer number
See member number.
program region
The lowest-addressed half of process address virtual memory space (PO space). The program region
contains the image currently being executed by the process and other user code called by the image.
program region base register (P08R)
The processor register, or its equivalent in a hardware control block, that contains the base virtual
address of the page table entry for virtual page number 0 in a process program region.
program region length register ( POLR)
The processor register, or its equivalent in a hardware process control block, that contains the number
of entries in the page table for a process program region.
program section (psect) ·
A portion of a program with a given protection and set of storage management attributes. Program
sections that have the same attributes are gathered together by the linker to form an image section.
project number
See group number or account number.
pure code
See reentrant code.
quadword
Eight contiguous bytes (64 bits) starting on an addressable byte boundary. Bits are numbered from
right to left, 0 to 63. A quadword is identified by the address of the byte containing the low-order bit
(bit 0). When interpreted arithmetically, a quadword is a two's complement integer with significance
increasing from bit 0 to bit 62. Bit 63 is used as the sign bit. The value of the integer is in the range -.263
to .263-1.
qualifier
A portion of a command string that modifies a command verb or command parameter by selecting one
of several options. A qualifier, if present, follows the command verb or parameter to which it applies
and is in the format: "/qualifier:option." For example, in the command string "PRINT filename/COPIES:3," the COPIES qualifier indicates that the user wants three copies of a given file
printed.
queue
l.
noun. A circular, doubly linked list. See system queues. verb. To make an entry in a list or table,
perhaps using the INSQUE instruction.

See job queue.

G-26

queue priority
The priority assigrttd to a job placed in a spooler queue or a batch queue.
quota
The total amount of a system resource, such as CPU time, that a job is allowed to use in an accounting
period, as specified by the system manager in the user authorization file. See also limit.
random access by record's file address
The retrieval of a record by its unique address, which is provided to the program by record management services (RMS). The method of access can be used to randomly access a s~quentially organized
file containing variable length records.
random access by reladve record number
The retrieval or storage of a record by specifying its position relative to the beginning of the file.
read access type
An instruction or procedure operand attribute indicating that the specified operand is only read during
instruction or procedure execution.
record access block (RAB)
A record management services (RMS) user data structure that represents a request for a record access
stream. A RAB relates to operations on the records within a file, such as UPDATE, DELETE, or
GET.
record access mode
The method used in record management services (RMS) for retrieving and storing a record in a file.
One of three methods: sequential, random, and record's file address.
record management senices (RMS)
A set of operating system procedures that are called by programs to process files and records within
files. RMS allows programs to issue READ and WRITE requests at the record level (record 1/0), as
well as read and write blocks (block 1/0). RMS is an integral part of the system software. RMS
procedures run in executive mode.
record-oriented deYice
A device such as a terminal, line printer, or card reader, on which the largest unit of data a program
can access in one 1/0 operation is the device's physical record.
record's file address
The unique address of a record in a file that allows records to be accessed randomly regardless of file
organization.
record slot
A fixed length area in a relatively organized file that is used to contain one record.
reentrant code
Code that is never modified during execution. It is possible to let many users share the same copy of a
procedure or program written as reentrant code.
register
A storage location in hardware logic other than main memory. Sec also general register, processor
register, and device register.

G-27

register deferred indexed mode
An indexed addressing mode in which the base operand specifier uses register deferred mode addressing.
register deferred mode
In register deferred mode addressing, the contents of the specified register are used as the address of
the actual instruction operand.
register mode
In register mode addressing, the contents of the specified register are used as the actual instruction
operand.
relatiYe file organization
.
A file organization in which the file contains fixed length record cells. Each cell is assigned a consecutive number that represents its position relative to the beginning of a file. Records within each cell
can be as big as or smaller than the cell. Relative file organization permits sequential record access,
random record access by record number. and random record access by the record's file address.
resource
A physical part of the computer system such as a device or memory, or an interlocked data structure
such as a mutex. Quotas and limits control the use of physical resources.
resource wait mode
An execution state in which a process indicates that it will wait until a system resource becomes
available when it issues a service request requiring a resource. If a process wants notification when a
resource is not available, it can disable resource wait mode during program execution.
return status code
See status code.
run time procedure library
The collection of procedures available to native mode images at run time. These library procedures
(such as trigonometric functions, etc.) are common to all native mode images~ regardless of the lan··
guage processor used to compile or assemble the program.
scatter/ gather
The ability to transfer in one 1/0 operation data from discontiguous pages in memory to contiguous
blocks on disk, or data from contiguous blocks on disk to discontiguous pages in memory.
secondary storage
Random access mass storage.
secondary vector
A location that identifies the starting address of a condition handler to be executed when a condition
occurs and the primary vector contains zero or the handler to which the primary vector points chooses
not to handle the condition.
section
A portion of process virtual memory that has common memory management attributes (protection,
access, cluster factor, etc.). It is created from an image section, a disk file, or as the result of a create
virtual address space system service. See global section, private section, image section, and program
section.

G-28

sequential access mode
The retrieval or sto&ge of records in which a program successively reads or writes records one after the
other in the order in which they appear, starting and ending at any arbitrary point in the file.
sequential file Oflanization
A file organization in which records appear in the order in which they were originally written. The
records can be of fixed length or variable length. Although one does not speak of record slots with
sequentially organized files, for purposes of comparison with relatively organized files one can say that
the record itself is the same as its record slot, and its record number is the same as its relative slot
number. Sequential file organization permits sequential record access and random access by a record's
file address. Sequential file organization with fixed length records also permits random access by
relative record number.
sharable image
An image that has all of its internal references resolved, but which must be linked with an object
module(s) to produce an executable image. A sharable image cannot be executed. A sharable image file
can be used to contain a library of routines. A sharable image can be used to create a global section by
the system manager.
~
shell process
A predefined process that the job initiator copies to create the minimum context necessary to establish
a process.

signal
1.
An electrical impulse conveying information.
2.
The software mechanism used to indicate that an exception condition was detected.
slave terminal
A terminal from which it is not possible to issue commands to the command interpreter. A terminal
assigned to application software.
small process
A system process that has no control region in its virtual address space and has an abbreviated context.
Examples are the working set swapper and the null process. A small process is scheduled in the same
manner as user processes, but must remain resident during its execution.
·
software context
The context maintained by the operating system that describes a process. See software process control
block (PCB).
software interrupt
An interrupt generated on interrupt priority level 1 through 15, which can be requested only by software.
software process control block (PCB)
The data structure used to contain a process's software context. The operating system defines a software PCB for every process when the process is created. The software PCB includes the following
kinds of information about the process: current state; storage address if it is swapped out of memory;
unique identification of the process, and address of the process header (which contains the hardware
PCB). The software PCB resides in system region virtual address space. It is not swapped with a
process.
software priority
See process priority and queue priority.
G-29

spoolin1
· hera 1dev1ce
· (sue h as a l'me pnnter
·
)
Output spooling: The method by which output to a 1ow-specd penp
is placed into queues maintained on a high-speed device (such as disk) to await transmission to the
low-speed device.
Input spooling: The method by which input from a low-speed peripheral (such as the card reader) is
placed into queues maintained on a high-speed device (such as disk) to await transmission to a job
processing that input.
spool queue
The list of files supplied by processes that are to be processed by a symbiont. For example, a line
printer queue is a list of files to be printed on the line printer.
stack
An area of memory set aside for temporary data storage, or for procedure and interrupt service linkages. A stack uses the last-in, first-out concept. As items are added to ("pushed on") the stack, the
stack pointer decrements. As items are retrieved from ("popped off') the stack, the stack pointer
increments.
stack frame
A standard data structure built on the stack during a procedure call, starting from the location addressed by the frame pointer (FP) to lower addresses, and popped off during a return.from procedure.
Also called call frame.
stack pointer (SP)
General register 14(R14). SP contains the address of the top (lowest address) of the processor-defined
stack. Reference to SP will access one of the five possible stack pointers, kernel, executive, supervisor,
user, or interrupt, depending on the value in the current mode and interrupt stack bits in the processor
status longword (PSL).
state queue
A list of processes in a particular processing state. The scheduler uses state queues to keep track of
processes' eligibility to execute. They include: processes waiting for a common event flag, suspended
·
processes, and executable processes.
status code
A longword value that indicates the success or failure of a specific function. For example, system
services always return a status code in RO upon completion.
store throu1h
See write through.
stron1 definition
Definition of a global symbol that is explicitly available for reference by modules linked with the
module in which the definition occurs. The linker always lists a global symbol with a strong definition
in the symbol portion of the map. The librarian always includes a global symbol with a strong definition in the global symbol table of a library.
stron1 reference
A reference to a global symbol in an object module that requests the linker to report an error if it does
not find a definition for the symbol during linking. If a library contains the definition, the linker
incorporates the library module defining the global symbol into the image containing the strong reference.

r.."ln

subprocess
A subsidiary procels created by another process. The process that creates a subprocess is its owner. A
subprocess receives resource quotas and limits from its owner. When an owner process is removed
from the system, all its subprocesses (and their subprocesses) are also removed.
supenisor mode
The third most privileged processor access mode (mode 2). The operating system's command interpreter runs in supervisor mode.
suspension
A state in which a process is inactive, but known to the system. A suspended process becomes active
again only when another process requests the operating system to resume it. Contrasts with hibernation.
swap mode
A process execution state that determines the eligibility of a process to be swapped out of the balance
set. If process swap mode is disabled, the process working set is locked in the balance set.
swapping
The method for sharing memory resources among several processes by writing an entire working s~ to
secondary storage (swap out) and reading another working set into memory (swap in). For example, a
process's working set can be written to secondary storage while the process is waiting for 1/0 completion on a slow device. It is brought back into the balance set when 1/0 completes. Contrasts with
paging.
switch
See (command) qualifier.
symbiont
A full process that transfers record-oriented data to or from a mass storage device. For example, an
input symbiont transfers data from card readers to disks. An output symbiont transfers data from
disks to line printers.
symbiont manager
The function (in the system process called the job controller) that maintains spool queues, and dynamically creates symbiont processes to perform the necessary 1/0 operations.
symbol
See local symbol, global symbol, and universal global symbol.
synchronous backplane interconnect ( SBI)
The part of the hardware that interconnects the CPU, memory controllers. Massbus adapters, the
Unibus adapter.
synchronous record operation
A mode of record processing in which a user program issues a record read or write request and then
waits until that request is fulfilled before continuing to execute.
system
In the context "system, owner, group, world," the system refers to the group numbers that are used by
the operating system and its controlling users, the system operators and system manager.
system address space
See system space and system region.

G-31

system base register {'SBR)
A processor register containing the physical address of the base of the system page table (SPT).
system buffered 1/0
An 1/0 operation, such as terminal or mailbox 1/0, in which an intermediate buffer from the system
pool is used instead of a processor-specified buffer. Contrasts with direct 1/0.
system control block (SCB)
The data structure in system space that contains all the interrupt and exception vectors. known to the
system.
system control block base register (SCBB)
A processor register containing the base address of the system control block.
system device
The random access mass storage device unit on which the volume containing the operating system
software resides.
system dynamic memory
Memory reserved for the operating system to allocate as needed for temporary storage. For example,
when an image issues an 1/0 request, system dynamic memory is used to contain the 1/0 request
packet. Each process has a limit on the amount of system dynamic memory that can be allocated for its
use at one time.
system identification register
A processor register that contains the processor type and serial number.
system image
The image that is read into memory from secondary storage when the system is started up.
system length register (SLR)
A processor register containing the length of the system page table (SPT) in longwords, that is, the
number of page table entries (PTEs) in the system region page table.
system page table (SPT)
The data structure that maps the system region virtual addresses, including the addresses used to refer
to the process page tables. The SPT contains one page table entry (PTE) for each page of system region
virtual memory. The physical base address of the SPT is contained in a register called the system base
register (SBR).
system process
A process that provides system-level functions. Any process that is part of the operating system. See
also small process, fork process.
system programmer
A person who designs and/or writes operating systems, or who designs and writes procedures or
programs that provide general purpose services for an application system.
system queue
A queue used and maintained by operating system procedures. See also state queues.

system region
The third quarter .of virtual address space. The lowest-addressed half of system space. Virtual addresses in the system region are sharable between processes. Some of the data structures mapped by the
system region virtual addresses are: system entry vectors, the system control block (SCB), the system
page table (SPT), and process page tables.
system se"ices
Procedures provided by the operating system that can be called by user processes.
system space
The highest-addressed half of virtual address space. See also system region.
system virtual address
A virtual address identifying a location mapped by an address in system space.
system virtual space
See system space.
task
An RSX-11/IAS term for a process and image bound together.
terminal
The general name for those peripheral devices that have keyboards and video scre:ns or printers.
Under program control, a terminal enables people to type commands and data on the keyboard and
receive messages on the video screen or printer. Examples of terminals are the LA36 DECwriter hardcopy terminal and VT52 video display terminal.
time-critical process
A process assigned to a software priority level between 16 and 31. inclusive. The scheduling priority
assigned to a time-critical process is never modified by the scheduler, although it can be modified by
the system manager or process itself.
timer
A system fork process that maintains the time of day and the date. It also scans. for device timeouts and
performs time-dependent scheduling upon request.
·
track
A collection of blocks at a single radius on one recording surface of a disk.
transfer address
The address of the location containing a program entry point (the first instruction to execute).
translation buffer
An internal processor cache containing translations for recently used virtual addresses.
trap
An exception condition that occurs at the end of the instruction that caused the exception. The program counter (PC) saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction that would normally have
been executed. All software can enable and disable some of the trap condition with a single instruction.
trap enables
Three bits in the processor status word that control the processor's action on certain arithmetic exceptions.

G-33

two's complement
A binary representation fo~ integers in which a negative number is one greater than the bit complement
of the positive number.
two-way auociathe cache
A cache organization that has two groups of directly mapped blocks. Each group contains several
blocks for each index position in the cache. A block of data from main memory can go into any group
at its proper index position. A two-way associative cache is a compromise betwe~n the extremes of
fully associative and direct mapping cache organizations that takes advantage of the features of both.
type ahead
A terminal handling technique in which the user can enter commands and data while the software is
processing a previously entered command. The commands typed ahead are not echoed on the terminal
until the command processor is ready to process them. They are held in a type ahead buffer.
unit record device
A device such as a card reader or line printer.
universal global symbol
A global symbol in a sharable image that can be used by modules linked with that sharable image.
Universal global symbols are typically a subset of all the global symbols in a sharable image. When
creating a sharable image, the linker ensures that universal global symbols remain available for reference after symbols have been resolved.
unwind the call stack
To remove call frames from the stack by tracing back through nested procedure calls using the current
contents of the FP register and the frame pointer (f P) register contents stored on the stack for each call
frame.
urgent interrupt
An interrupt received on interrupt priority levels 24 through 31. These can be generated only by the
processor for the interval clock, serious errors, and power-fail.
user authorization file
A file containing an entry for every user that the system manager authorizes to gain access to the
system. Each entry identifies the user name, password, default account. user identification code (UIC),
quotas, limits, and privileges assigned to individuals who use the system.
user environment test package ( UETP)
A collection of routines that verify that the hardware and software systems are complete, properly
installed, and ready to be used.
user file directory (UFO)
See directory.
user identification code (UIC)
The pair of numbers assigned to users and to files, global sections, common event flag clusters, and
mailboxes that specify the type of access (read and/or write access, and in the case of files execute
and/or delete access) available to the owners, group, world, and system. It consists of a group number
and a member number separated by a comma.
user mode
The least privileged processor access mode (mode 3). User processes and the run time library procedures run in user mode.

user name
The name that a person types on a terminal to log on to the system.
user number
See member number.
user priYileges
The privileges granted a user by the system manager. See process privileges.
udlity
A program that provides a set of related general purpose functions, such as a program development
utility (an editor, a linker, etc.), a file management utility (file copy or file format translation program),
or operations management utility (disk backup/restore, diagnostic program, etc.).
Yalue return registers
The general registers RO and R 1 used by convention to return function values. These registers are not
preserved by any called procedures. They are available as temporary registers to any called procedure.
All other registers (R2, R3, ... , Rl 1, AP, FP, SP, PC) are preserved across procedure calls.
Yariable-length bit field
·
,
A set of zero to 32 contiguous bits located arbitrarily with respect to byte boundaries. A variablebit
field is specified by four attributes:
1.

the address A of a byte,

the bit position P of the starting location of the bit field with respect to bit 0 of the byte at
address A.

the size, in bits, of the bit field, and

whether the field is signed or unsigned.

Yariable-length record format
A file format in which records are not necessarily the same length.
Yariable with fixed-length control (VFC) record format
A file format in which records of variable length contain an additional fixed-length control area. The
control area may be used to contain file line numbers and/or print format controls.
vector
.
1.
An interrupt or exception vector is a storage location known to the system that contains the
starting address of a procedure to be executed when a given interrupt or exception occurs. The
system defines separate vectors for each interrupting device controller and for classes of exceptions. Each system vector is a longword.
2.

For the purposes of exception handling, users can declare up to two software exception vectors
(primary and secondary) for each of the four access modes. Each vector contains the address of
a condition handler.

A one-dimensional array.

G-35

venion number
l.
The field following the file type in a file specification. It is separated from file type by a period(.)
or semicolon (;)and consists of a number that generally identifies it as one version among all the
files having the identical file specification but for version number.

The number used to identify the revision level of program.

virtual addreu
A 32-bit integer identifying a byte "location" in virtual address space. The memory management
hardware translates a virtual address to a physical address. The term virtual address may also refer to
the address used to identify a virtual block on a mass storage device.
virtual addreu space
The set of all possible virtual addresses that an image executing in the context of a process can use to
identify the location of an instruction or data. The virtual address space seen by the programmer is a
linear array of 4,294,967,296 (232) byte address.
virtual block number
A number used to identify a block on a mass storage device. The number is a file-relative address
rather than a logical (volume-oriented) or physical (device-oriented) address. The first block in a file is
always virtual block number l.
virtual I/ 0 functions
A set of 1/0 functions that must be interpreted by an ancillary control process.
virtual memory
The set of storage locations in physical memory and on disk that are referred to by virtual addresses.
From the programmer's viewpoint, the secondary storage locations appear to be locations in physical
memory. The size of virtual memory in any system depends on the amount of physical memory available and the amount of disk storage used for nonresident virtual memory.
virtual page number
The virtual address of a page of virtual memory.
volume
A mass storage medium such as a disk pack or reel of magnetic tape.
volume set
The file-structured collection of data residing on one or more mass storage media.
wait
To become inactive. A proc·ess enters a process wait state when the process suspends itself, hibernates,
or declares that it needs to wait for an event, resource, mutex, etc.
wake
To activate a hibernating process. A hibernating process can be awakened by another process or by the
timer process, if the hibernating process or another process scheduled a wake-up call.
weak definition
Definition of a global symbol that is not explicitly available for reference by modules linked with the
module in which the definition occurs. The librarian does not include a global symbol with a weak
definition in the global symbol table of a library. Weak definitions are often used when creating
libraries to identify those global symbols that are needed only if the module containing them is otherwise linked with a program.

weak reference
A reference to a glebal symbol that requests the linker not to report an error or to search the default
library's global symbol table to resolve the reference if the definition is not in the modules explicitly
supplied to the linker. Weak references are often used when creating object modules to identify those
global symbols that may not be needed at run time.
wild card
A symbol, such as an asterisk, that is used in place of a file name, file type, directory name, or version
number in a file specification to indicate "all" for the given field.
window
See mapping window.
word
Two contiguous bytes (16 bits) starting on an addressable byte boundary. Bits are numbered from the
right, 0 through 15. A word is identified by the address of the byte containing bit 0. When interpreted
arithmetically, a word is a two's complement integer with significance increasing from bit 0 to bit 14. If
interpreted as a signed integer. bit 15 is the sign bit. The value of the integer is in the range -32768 to
32767. When interpreted as an unsigned integer, significance increases from bit 0 through bit 15 and
the value of the unsigned integer is in the range 0 through 65535.
working set
The set of pages in process space to which an executing process can refer without incurring a page
fault. The working set must be resident in memory for the process to execute. The remaining pages of
that process, if any, are either in memory and not in the process working set or they are on secondary
storage.
working set swapper
A system process that brings process working sets into the balance set and removes them from the
balance set.
world
In the context .. system, owner, group, world," world refers to all users, including the system operators.
the system manager. and users both in an owner's group and in any other group.
write access type
The specified operand of an instruction or procedure is only written during that instruction's or procedure's execution.
write allocate
A cache management technique in which cache is allocated on a write miss as well as on the usual read
miss.
write back
A cache management technique in which data from a write operation to cache is copied into main
memory only when the data in cache must be overwritten. This results in temporary inconsistencies
between cache and main memory. Contrasts with write through.
write through
.
A cache management technique in which data from a write operation is copied in both cache and main
memory. Cache and main memory data are always consistent. Contrasts with write back.

G-37

COMMONLY USED MNEMONICS

ACP
ANS
ASCII
AST
ASTLVL
CCB
CM
CRB
CRC
DAP
DDB
DDCMP
DDT
DV

ECB
ECC
ESP
ESR
FllACP
FAB
FCA

FCB
FCS
FDT
FP

FPD
FU

GSD
GST
IDB
IPL
IRP
ISECT

ISD
ISP
IS
ISR
IV

Ancillary Control Process
American National Standard
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Asynchronous System Trap
Asynchronous System Trap LeVel
Channel Control Block
Compatibility Mode bit in the hardware PSL
Channel Request Block
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Data Access Protocol
Device Data Block
DIGITAL Data Communications Message Protocol
Driver Data Table
Decimal o Verflow trap enable bit in the PSW
Exit Control Block
Error Correction Code
Executive mode Stack Pointer
Exception Service Routine
Files-I I Ancillary Control Process
File Access Block
Fixed Control Area
File Control Block
File Control Services
Function Decision Table
Frame Pointer
First Part (of an instruction) Done
Floating Underflow trap enable bit in the PSW
Global Section Descriptor
Global Symbol Table
Interrupt Dispatch Block
Interrupt Priority Level
I/O Request Packet
Image SECTion
Image Section Descriptor
Interrupt Stack Pointer
Interrupt Stack bit in PSL
Interrupt Service Routine
Integer oVerflow trap enable bit in the PSW

JCS

Joint Control Store

KSP

Kernel mode Stack Pointer
Massbus Adapter
Must Be Zero
Monitor Console Routine
Master File Directory
Move From Process Register instruction
Memory Mapping Enable
Move To Process Register instruction
MUTual EXclusion semaphore
Network Services Protocol
OPeration COMmunication manager

MBA
MBZ

MCR
MFD
MFPR

MME
MTPR
MVTEX

NSP
OPCOM

r.. '\R

POBR
POLR
POPT
PIBR
PILR
PIPT
PC
PCB
PCBB
PFN

PIO
PME
PSECT
PSL
PSW

PTE
QIO
RAB
RFA
RMS
RWEO

SBI
SBR
SCB
SCBB
SLR

SP
SPT
SSP
SVA
TP

UBA
UCB

UETP

UFO
UIC

USP

VCB

VPN
WCB
WCS

woes

Program region Base Register
Program region Length Register
Program region Page Table
control region Base Register
control region Limit Register
control region Page Table
Program Counter
Process Control Block
Process Control Block Base register
Page Frame Number
Process Identification Number
Performance Monitor Enable bit in PCB
Program SECTion
Processor Status Longword
Processor Status Word
Page Table Entry
Queue Input/Output request system service
Record Access Block
Record's File Address
Record Management Services
Read, Write, Execute, Delete
Synchronous Backplane Interconnect
System Base Register
System Control Block
System Control Block Base register
System Length Register
Stack Pointer
System Page Table
Supervisor mode Stack Pointer
System Virtual Address
Trace trap Pending bit in PSL
Unibus Adapter
Unit Control Block
User Environment Test Package
User File Directory
User Identification Code
User mode Stack Pointer
Volume Control Block
Virtual Page Number
Window Control Block
Writable Control Store
Writable Diagnostic Control Store

G-39

APPENDIX H
NATIVE MODE INSTRUCTION SET

The instruction set that the processor executes is selected under operating system control to either
native mode or compatibility mode. The native mode instruction set is based on over 200 different op
codes. The op codes can be grouped into classes based on their function and use. Instructions used to
manipulate the general data types include:
•
•
•
•

integer and floating-point instructions
packed decimal instructions
character string instructions
bit field instructions

Instructions that arc used to manipulate special kinds of data include:
•
•
•

queue manipulation instructions
address manipulation instructions
user-programmed general register control instructions

Instructions that provide basic program flow control and enable you to call procedures arc:
•
•
•

branch, jump, and case instructions
subroutine call instructions
procedure call instructions

Table H-1 lists the basic instruction operations in order by these classifications. instructions that
enable operating system procedures to provide user mode processes with services requiring privilege
are listed in the table, but discussed in the system programming environment section. Instructions that
are singular in the functions they provide arc listed last.

H-1

Table H-1

Natne Mode Instruction Set Summary

Integer and Floatin1-Point Losical Instructions
MOVS
MNEGS
MCOMS
MOVZS
CLRS
CVTS
CVTRS
CMPS
TSTS
BISS2
BISS3
BICS2
BICS3
BITS
XORS2
XORS3
ROTL

Move (B,W.L.F.D.Q)•
Move Negated (B,W.L.F.D)
Move Complemented (B.W,L)
Move Zero-Extended (BW,BL,WL)
Clear (B,W,L•Q,F•D)
Convert (B,W.L.F.D) (B.W,L,F.D)
Convert Rounded (F,D) to Longword
Compare (8,W.L,F.D)
Test (B,W,L.F,D)
Bit Set (B,W,L) 2-0pcrand
Bit Set (B,W,L) 3-0pcrand
Bit Clear (B,W,L) 2-0pcrand
Bit Clear (B,W,L) 3-0pcrand
Bit Test (B,W,L)
Exclusive OR (B,W,L) 2-0pcrand
Exclusive OR (B,W.L) 3-0pcrand
Rotate Longword

lnteser and Floating-Point Arithmetic Instructioes
INCS
DECS
ASHS
ADDS2
ADDS3
ADWC
ADAWI
SUBS2
SUBS3
SBWC
MULS2
MUU3
EMUL
DIVS2
DIVS3
EDIV
EM ODS
POLYS

Increment (B.W.L)
Decrement (B.W,L)
Arithmetic Shift (L.Q)
Add (B,W.L.F.D) 2-0pcrand
Add (B.W,L,F,D) 3-0pcrand
Add with Carry
Add Aligned Word Interlocked
Subtract (B,W,L.F.D) 2-0pcrand
Subtract (B,W,L.F.D) 3-0pcrand
Subtract with Carry
Multiply (B.W.L.F.D) 2-0perand
Multiply (B.W.L.F.D) 3-0perand
Extended Multiply
Divide (B.W,L.F.D) 2-0pcrand
Divide (B.W.L.F.D) 3-0pcrand
Extended Divide
Extended Modulus (F,D)
Polynomial Evaluation (F.D)

Packed Decimal Instructions
MOVP
CMPP3
CMPP4
ASHP
ADDP4
ADDP6
SUBP4
SUBP6
MULP
DIVP
CVTLP
CVTPL
CVTPT
CVTTP
CVTPS
CVTSP
EDITPC

Move Packed
Compare Packed 3-0perand
Compare Packed 4-0pcrand
Arithmetic Shift Packed and Round
Add Packed 4-0perand
Add Packed 6-0pcrand
Subtract Packed 4-0pcrand
Subtract Packed 6-0pcrand
Multiply Packed
Divide Packed
Convert Long to Packed
Convert Packed to Long
Convert Packed to Trailing
Convert Trailing to Packed
Convert Packed to Separate
Convert Separate to Packed
Edit Packed to Character String

H-'

T.... H·l

Natl••

M•

lutructioe Set Sua. .ry (Cont)

MOVCJ
MOVCS
MOVTC
MOVTUC
CMPCJ
CM PCS
LOCC
SKPC
SCA NC
SPA NC
MATCHC

Move Character 3-0perand
Move Character S..()perand
Move Translated Characters
Move Translated Unit Character
Compare Characters 3-0perand
Compare Characters S-Operand
Locate Character
Skip Character
Scan Characten
Span Characten
Match Characten

EXTV
EXTZV
INSV
CMPV
CMPZV
FFS
FFC

Extract Field
Extract Zero-Extended Field
Insert Field
Compare Field
Compare Zero-Extended Field
Find Fint Set
Find First Clear

..... l..mactloll
INDEX

Compute Index

INSQUE
REMQUE

Insert Entry in Queue
Remove Entry from Queue

MOVAS
PUSHAS

Move Address (B,W,L•F,Q•D)
Push Address (B,W,L•F,Q•D) on Stack

Geaeral R.pter Muipulation llllh'Udiom
PUSHL
PUSHR
POPR
MOVPSL
BISPSW
BICPSW

Push Longword on Stack
Push Registers on Stack
Pop Registers from Stack
Move from Processor Status Longword
Bit Set Processor Status Word
Bit Clear Processor Status Word

UllCOllllidollal Bralldl and Jump lmtructlona
BR
JMP

Branch with (Byte, Word) Displacement
Jump

H-3

TUle H·l

Natlte MMe llllDUdioll Set Sum•ry (Cont)

Branch on C..Utioll Code
BLSS
BLSSU
BLEQ
BLEQU
BEQL
(BEQLU)
BNEQ
(BNEQU)
BGTR
BGTRU
BGEQ
BGEQU
(BCC)
BVS

eve

Less Than
Less than Unsigned
Less than or Equal
Less than or Equal Unsigned
Equal
(Equal Unsianed)
Not Equal
(Not Equal Unsigned)
Greater than
Greater than Unsigned
Greater than or Equal
Greater than or Equal Unsigned
(Carry Cleared)
Overflow Set
Overflow Clear

Branch on Bit
BLBS
BBS
BBSS
BBCS
BBSSI
BBCCI

Branch on Low Bit (Set, Clear)
Branch on Bit (Set. Clear)
Branch on Bit Set and (Set. Clear) bit
Branch on Bit Clear and (Set, Clear) bit
Branch on Bit Set and Set bit interlocked
Branch on Bit Clear and Clear bit interlocked

Loop and Cue Branch
ACBS
AOBLEQ
AOBLSS
SOBGEQ
SO BG TR
CASES

Add, Compare and Branch (B,W,L.f.0)
Add One and Branch Less Than or Equal
Add One and Branch Less Than
Subtract One and Branch Greater Than or Equal
Subtract One and Branch Greater Than
Case on (8,W,L)

Subroutine C.il Ull Retun lnstnctions
BSBS
JSB
RSB

Branch to Subroutine with (B.W) Displacement
Jump to Subroutine
Return from Subroutine

ProadlUe Call Ull Ran lllltnetioas

CALLG
CALLS
RET

Call Procedure with General Argument List
Call Procedure with Stack Argument List
Return from Procedure

H-4

Table H-1

Nathe Mode Instruction Set Summary (Cont)

Protected Procedure Call and Retum Instructions
CHMS
REI
PROBER
PROBEW

Change Mode to (Kernel. Executive, Supervisor. User)
Return from Exception or Interrupt
Probe Read
Probe Write

PrMlqed Processor Rqister Control Instructions
SVPCTX
LDPCTX
MTPR
MFPR

Save Process Context
Load Process Context
Move to Process Register
Move from Processor Register

Special Function Instructions
CRC
BPT

XFC
NOP
HALT

Cyclic Redundancy Check
Breakpoint Fault
Extended Function Call
No Operation
Halt

H-5

APPENDIX I
COMPATIBILITY MODE INSTRUCTION SET (PDP-II)

The compatibility mode instruction set is the PDP-11 instruction set. Programs previously constructed
New programs can also be developed
with this instruction set can be run directly on the VAX-11. on the VAX-11
• using this instruction. Programs using the native mode instruction set can be run
concurrent with programs using the compatibility mode. Table 1-1 lists the basic instruction operations.
Table 1-1

Compadltllity Mode lastrucdon Set Summary
Sinsle Operand lnstrucdons

CLR(B)
DEC(B)
INC(B)
NEG(B)
TST(B)
COM(B)
ASR(B)
ASL(B)
ASH
ASHC
ADC(B)
SBC(B)
SXT
ROL(B)
ROR(B)
SWAB

Clear Destination
Decrement Destination
Increment Destination
Negate Destination
Test Destination
Complement Destination
Arithmetic Shift Right Destination
Arithmetic Shift Left Destination
Shift Arithmetically
Arithmetic Shift Combined
Add Carry Destination
Subtract Carry Destination
Shift Extend Destination
Rotate Left Destination
Rotate Right Destination
Swap Bytes Destination

Double Operand Instructions
MOV(B)
ADD
MUL
DIV
XOR
BIS(B)
BIT(B)
BIC(B)

Move Source to Destination
Add Source to Destination
Multiply
Divide
Exclusive OR
Bit Set
Bit Test
Bit Clear

1-1

T.a.le 1-1 Compatibility Mode llllltl'Udioll Set Sum•ary (Cont)
Propam COllCrol lllltrucdolll
BR
BEQ
BNE
BMI
BPL
BCS
BCC
BVS

eve

BLT
BGE
BLE
BGT
BHI
BLOS
BHIS
BLO
JSR
MARK
RTS
SPL
JMP
SOB
EMT
TRAP
BPT

IOT
RTI

RTT

Branch (Unconditional)
Branch on Equal (Zero)
Branch Not Equal (Zero)
Branch on Minus
Branch on Plus
Branch on Carry Set
Branch on Carry Clear
Branch on Overflow Set
Branch on Overflow Clear
Branch on Less than (Zero)
Branch on Greater than or Equal (Zero)
Branch on Less than or Equal (Zero)
Branch on Greater than (Zero)
Branch on Higher
Branch on Lower or Same
Branch on Higher or Same
Branch on Lower
Jump to Subroutine
Mark
Return from Subroutine
Set Priority Level
Jump
Subtract One and Branch
Emulator Tapes
Trap
Breakpoint Trap
1/0 Trap
Return From Interrupt
Return From Trap

Mlscellueoas

HALT
WAIT
RESET
MTPI
MTPD
MFPI
MFPD

Halt
Wait for Interrupt
Reset External Bus
Move to Previous Instruction Space
Move to Previous Data Space
Move From Previous Instruction Space
Move From Previous Data Space

COlldltioa Code Operaton
CLC
CLV
CLZ
CLN
SEC
SEV
SEZ
SEN

sec

CCC

Clear C
Clear V
Clear Z
Clear N
Set C
Set V
Set Z
Set N
Set all cc
Clear all CCs

,_,

APPENDIX J
7-BIT ASCII CODE

OCTAL
CODE

CHAR

OCTAL
CODE

CHAR

000

NUL

040

001
002
003

SOH
STX
ETX
EQT
ENQ

041
042
043

004

005

04S

%
&

ACK

046

007
010
OI I
012
013
014
OlS
OI6
017
020
021
022
023
024
02S
026
027
030
031
032
033
034
03S
036
037

BEL
BS

047

LF
VT

FF
CR

SI
OLE
DCl
DC2
DC3
DC4

NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN

SUB
ESC

FS
GS
RS

006

•

oso

(

OSI
OS2
OS3
OS4

)

oss

OS6
OS7
060

061
062
063
064
06S
066

067
070
071
072
073
074
07S
076
077

100
101
102
I03
I04
IOS
106
I07
110
111
Il2
113
114
lIS
116
117
120
I2I
122
123
124
I2S
I26
127
130
131
· 132
133
134
13S
136
137

044

OCTAL
CODE

•

.+
.
I
0
I
2
3
4

6
7
8
9

•

<
=

>
?

J-1

CHAR
@

D
E
F
G

H
I
J

K
L

M
N
0
p

Q
R

s
T

w
x
y

z
[

\
lort
A

-or+-

OCTAL
CODE
140
141
I42
I43
I44
I4S
146
I47
ISO
ISI
1S2
1S3
1S4
lSS
1S6
1S7
160
16'1
162
163
164
16S
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
17S
176
177

CHAR
\
a
b

c
d

e
f
g
h
i
j

1
m
n
0

p
q
r

s
t

u
v
w

x
y

{

}

-DEL

APPENDIX K
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS

A number of diagnostic programs are available for use
in
troubleshooting the VAX-11/785 and its peripheral equipment.
These diagnostics are resident on floppy disks and on the
operating system disk. The floppy disks are listed in Table K-1.
Table K-1

VAX-11/785 Diagnostic Program Floppy Disks

NUMBER

TITLE

RXlA
RX2A
RX3A
RX5
RX8A
RXlO
RX22A

VAX
VAX
VAX
VAX
VAX
VAX
VAX

11785 Console
11785 Micro Diag #1
11785 Micro Diag #2
FP785 Micro Diag
11785 Micro Diag #3
11785 ETKAX Diag (CPU Cluster Exerciser)
11785 MA780 Micro

K-1

The diagnostic programs available for use on VAX-11/785
and resident on the system disk are listed in Table K-2.
Table K-2

systems

VAX-11/785 Diagnostic Programs

CODE

TITLE

ES CAA
ESCBA
ESCCA
ESCCB
ESCGA
ESCGB
ESCGC
ESCGD
ESDFA
ESDFB
ESDFC
ES SAA
ETKAB
ETKAC
ETKAD
ETKAE
ETKAF
ETKAG
ETKAH
ETKAJ
ETKAK
ETKAL
ETKAM
ETKAN
ETKAP
ETKAR
ETKAS
EVKAA
EVKAB
EVKAC
EVKAD
EVKAE

VAX MBA (RH780) Diagnostic
VAX UBA (DW780) Diagnostic
MA780 Multi-Port Exerciser
MA780 Multi-Port Memory Exerciser
CI780 Repair Level Part I
CI780 Repair Level Part II
CI780 Repair Level Part III
CI780 Repair Level Part IV
DR780 High Speed SBI Interface Part A
DR780 High Speed SBI Interface Part B
DR780 High Speed SBI Interface Part C
VAX-11/780 Diagnostic Supervisor
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Monitor
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Hardcore Monitor
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Hardcore Test Stream
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Micro Test Monitor
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Command Parser
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Directory Search Routine
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Volume #1
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Volume #2
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Microdiagnostic Fail Chain Monitor
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Fail Chain Volume #1
VAX-11/785 (KA785) Fail Chain Volume #2
VAX MA780 Microdiagnostic Go Chain
VAX MA780 Microdiagnostic Fail Chain
VAX-11/785 KA785 Microdiagnostic Volume #3
VAX-11/785 KA785 Fail Chain Volume #3
VAX-11 Hardcore Instruction Test
VAX Architectural Instruction
VAX Floating Point Instruction
VAX Compatibility Mode Instruction
VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction

K-2

Table K-3 explains the coding convention for VAX diagnostics.
Table K-3

VAX Diagnostic Coding Convention

EPXYD-R.P
E = System
E = VAX
P = Processor

c = VAX-11/750
N = VAX-11/730 and 11/725

s = VAX-11/780
T

= VAX-11/785

v = More than one VAX Processor
X = Device Category
A= Application (CR, LP, A-D, Misc.)

c = Channel Adapters (MBA, UBA)

D = Communication Devices (DMC, DZll)
G = CI Adapter
K = CPU
L = Database Files
M = Magnetic Tape (TE, TU, DT)
P = Test Equipment
Q = QIO Device Driver
R = Rotating Memory (RP, RK, RM, RS, RX)
S = System Monitor (Supervisor, Tape Monitor)
T = Terminal (LA36, VT52)
U = Utilities (Script file, Copy, Update)
W = Workstations
X = System Exerciser (EXR/BUSINT)
z = Media Packages
0-9 = Engineering File

K-3

Y = Device Type
Category Application
A = LP
B = CR
L = LPAll-K
Category Channel
A = MBA
B = UBA
C = MA780
D = IECll, IEUll-A
E = DT07
F = DEC DATAWAY
G = CI780
H = CI750/CI780 MICROCODE VERIFICATION (INTERNAL)
I = TEST BED ADAPTERS
J = NB! ADAPTER
Category Communications
A = DZ11,DZ32,DMZ32
B = DMC
c = Multiple Devices
D = DRll-C
E = DVll
F = DR780,DF11-W
G = DQSll
H = KMCll-B
I = KMSll-B
J = DMll-BA
K = DMSll-BA
L = DMF32 Combo
M = DMCll,DMRll,DMPll
N = DNll
p = PCLll
R = DRllB,DRll-W,DREll
s = DRSll/DSS
T = KCT32-A,FEPCM
u = DUPll
x = Multiple Devices
w = UNA
Category Database Files
A = CRD DATABASE FILES
B = SYSTEM EXERCISER DATABASE FILES

K-4

Category Magnetic Tape
A= TE16/77, TSll, TU78
B = TU81,TU80
Category QIO Device Drivers
For this category, the fourth and fifth letters of the
code are the device mnemonic.
For example, EVQDB is the QIO device driver for the
DB, or RP disk series.
Category Test Equipment
A = C1780 Node Tester
B = NI Tester
Category Rotating Memory
A = Multiple devices
B = RP04/5/6
C = DCL/RP04/5/6
D = RM03/RM05/RM80
E = RK611,RK06,RK07
F = RL02
G = RM80
H = RP07
I = RX02
J = MLll
K = !DC
L = UDA
M = RC25 (AZTEC)
Category System Monitor
A = Supervisor
B = Autosizer
C = DYDDM
Category Terminals
A = All Terminals
B = Terminal exerciser
C = VSll
D = 11C03-LH Fastek
G = VS70
Category Utility
A = Script File
B = Copy Command file

K-5

Category Workstation
A = VSlOO
B = Onyx
c = Agate,VS125
Category Exerciser
B = Exerciser Bus Interaction
D = Fifth character makes the code unique.
R = Revision (MAJOR)
p

= Revision (MINOR)

K-6

A through z and 1 through 9.

Digital Equipment Corporation. Bedford, MA o17 30